HDP820 Technical Service And Maintenance Manual DTC500 DTC515us

User Manual: DTC500

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 347 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders
User Guide (Rev. 6.0)
DTC500-LE (Single-Sided Card Printer/Encoders) (See DTC510 information)
DTC510 (Single-Sided Card Printer/Encoders)
DTC515 (Single-Sided Card Printer/Encoders)
DTC515-LC (Single-Sided Card Printer/Encoders)
DTC520 (Dual-Sided Card Printer/Encoders)
DTC525 (Dual-Sided Card Printer/Encoders)
DTC525-LC (Dual-Sided Card Printer/Encoders)
Part Number: L000699
RESTRICTED USE ONLY FARGO Electronic, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) ii
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0), property of FARGO
Electronics, Incorporated
Copyright 2002 by FARGO Electronics, Incorporated. All rights reserved. Printed in the
United States of America. Exclusive permission is granted to authorized resellers of FARGO
products to reproduce and distribute this copyrighted document to authorized FARGO
customers, who have signed a “no disclosure agreement” regarding the restricted,
proprietary use of said document.
The revision number for this document will be updated to reflect changes, corrections,
updates and enhancements to this document.
Revision Control
Number Date Document Title
Revision 6.0 1 March 2006 DTC500 Card Printer/Encoders User Guide
Revision 5.0 1 January 2004 Same document title
Revision 4.0 15 September 2003 Same document title
These reference documents were thoroughly reviewed to provide FARGO with professional
and international standards, requirements, guidelines and models for our technical, training
and user documentation. At all times, the Copyright Protection Notice for each document
was adhered to within our FARGO documentation process. This reference to other
documents does not imply that FARGO is an ISO-certified company at this time.
ANSI/ISO/ASQ Q9001-2000 American National Standard, (sub-title) Quality Management
Systems - Requirements (published by the American Society of Quality, Quality Press,
P.O. Box 3005, Milwaukee, Wisconsin 53201-3005)
The ASQ ISO 9000:2000 Handbook (editors, Charles A. Cianfrani, Joseph J. Tsiakals
and John E. West; Second Edition; published by the American Society of Quality, Quality
Press, 600 N. Plankinton Avenue, Milwaukee, Wisconsin 53203)
Juran's Quality Handbook (editors, Joseph M. Juran and A. Blanton Godfrey; Fifth
Edition, McGraw-Hill)
Any questions regarding changes, corrections, updates or enhancements to this document
should be forwarded to:
FARGO Electronics, Incorporated
Support Services
6533 Flying Cloud Drive
Eden Prairie, MN 55344 (USA)
(952) 941-9470
(800) 459-5636
FAX: (952) 941-7836
www.fargo.com
E-mail: sales@fargo.com
RESTRICTED USE ONLY FARGO Electronic, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) iii
Introduction
Reviewing the DTC500 Series Printers Overview
table
DTC500 Series Input
Hoppers
Card
Capacity Security Encoding
Modules Lamination
Module
DTC500-LE (Single-
Sided Card
Printer/Encoders)
See DTC510
information for
DTC500LE.
1 100 N/A Optional N/A
DTC510 (Single-Sided
Card Printer/Encoders) 1 100 N/A Optional N/A
DTC515 (Single-Sided
Card Printer/Encoders) 2 200 Included Optional Optional
DTC515-LC (Single-
Sided Card
Printer/Encoders)
2 200 Included Optional Included
DTC520 (Dual-Sided
Card Printer/Encoders) 2 100 N/A Optional N/A
DTC525 (Dual-Sided
Card Printer/Encoders) 2 200 Included Optional Optional
DTC525-LC (Dual-
Sided Card
Printer/Encoders)
2 200 Included Optional Included
RESTRICTED USE ONLY FARGO Electronic, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) iv
How to use the manual
The DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) is, in fact, the
troubleshooting and field service manual for the entire DTC500 card printer. The manual is
designed to provide Installers and Technicians with quick, efficient lookup of related
procedures, components and terms. The manual can be used effectively either in soft or
hard copy, depending on the preference of the Installer or Technician.
Manual Description
Sequence of Operations,
Glossary of Terms and
Technical/Functional
Specifications (hyper-linked)
You can go directly to the Sequence of Operations,
Glossary of Terms, Technical Specifications and
Functional Specifications to learn how to use the
processes, procedures, functions and windows for the
DTC500 Card Printer/Encoders within concise, correlative
tables.
Table of Contents (hyper-
linked) You can use the Table of Contents to quickly locate, for
example a procedure, the index or an appendix.
Troubleshooting,
Replacement, Removal,
Diagnostic and Navigation
Procedures (in hyper-linked
Sections)
You can go directly to Specifications, General
Troubleshooting, Printer Adjustments, Parts Replacement,
Printer Packing, Board Level Diagnostics, LCD On-Line
Menu Navigation and Firmware Updates to find
troubleshooting, removal and replacement procedures.
The section titles are always labeled according to their
function for consistent usage.
Cross-Referencing (hyper-
linked) You can use the cross-referencing links to quickly locate
an error message or a procedure.
Comprehensive Index
(hyper-linked) You can use the Comprehensive Index to quickly locate
information on the DTC500 Card Printer/Encoders, relating
to a specification, a procedural step, a window or screen, a
component, a term, a qualifier or a related feature to this
printer.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY FARGO Electronic, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) v
Safety Messages (review carefully)
Symbol Critical Instructions for Safety purposes
Danger:
Failure to follow these installation guidelines can result in death or
serious injury.
Information that raises potential safety issues is indicated by a warning
symbol (as shown to the below).
To prevent personal injury, refer to the following safety messages
before performing an operation preceded by this symbol.
To prevent personal injury, always remove the power cord prior to
performing repair procedures, unless otherwise specified.
To prevent personal injury, make sure only qualified personnel
perform these procedures.
Caution:
This device is electrostatically sensitive. It may be damaged if
exposed to static electricity discharges.
Information that raises potential electrostatic safety issues is indicated
by a warning symbol (as shown to the below).
To prevent equipment or media damage, refer to the following
safety messages before performing an operation preceded by this
symbol.
To prevent equipment or media damage, observe all established
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) procedures while handling cables in
or near the Circuit Board and Printhead Assemblies.
To prevent equipment or media damage, always wear an
appropriate personal grounding device (e.g., a high quality wrist
strap grounded to avoid potential damage).
To prevent equipment or media damage, always remove the
Ribbon and Cards from the printer before making any repairs,
unless otherwise specified.
To prevent equipment or media damage, take jewelry off of
fingers and hands, as well as thoroughly clean hands to remove oil
and debris before working on the printer.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY FARGO Electronic, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) vi
DTC500 Card Printer/Encoders Overview
Reviewing the DTC500 Block Diagram
Motors Sensors Parts
1
Hopper Lift 13
Card Detection 24
Card Input Roller
2
Hopper Transport 14
Flipper Table Card 25
Cleaning Cartridge
3
Encoding/Flipper Feed 15
Encoding TOF 26
Flipper Table Roller
4
Flipper Stepper 16
Flipper Home 27
Flipper Table
5
Ribbon Supply 17
Print TOF 28
Encoding Module
6
Ribbon Take-up 18
Ribbon Sensor Array 29
Encoding Feed Roller
7
Headlift 19
Ribbon Encoder 30
Card Feed Roller
8
Card Feed Stepper 20
Print Headlift 31
Platen Roller
21
Thermistor 32
Printhead
22
Cover Interlock 33
Printhead Cooling Fan
23
Release Lever 34
Card Input Hopper
24
RFID
25
Hopper Lift
26
Hopper Transport
27
Card Feed
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
2526
27
28
29
30
30
30
31
32
33
34
RESTRICTED USE ONLY FARGO Electronic, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) vii
Reviewing the DTC 525 Sequence of Operations
The following sequence describes a DTC525 doing a dual sided full color print job with
magnetic encoding.
Step
Process
1 The File information is received from the PC.
2 The Flipper Stepper activates and rotates the Flipper Table until the Flipper
Home Sensor is activated.
3 The Flipper Stepper rotates the Flipper Table back a specific number of steps
(based on the Flipper Offset setting) to return the Flipper Table to a level
position.
4 The Card Detection Sensor detects the presence of a Card in the exception
feed.
5 The Hopper Lift Motor activates and lowers the Card Hopper until the Hopper Lift
Sensor detects a change in state.
6 The Card Detection Sensor detects the presence of a Card.
If no card is seen, the following takes place:
a. The Hopper Lift Motor activates and raises the Card Hopper until the Hopper
Lift Sensor detects a change in state.
b. The Hopper Transport Motor activates and moves to the other Hopper until
the Hopper Position Sensor detects a change in state.
c. The Hopper Lift Motor activates and lowers the card Hopper until the Hopper
Lift Sensor is activated.
d. The Card Detection Sensor detects the presence of a Card.
7 The Card Feed Stepper activates and feeds a card through the Cleaning Roller
and onto the Flipper Table.
8 The Flipper Stepper rotates the Flipper Table a certain number of steps (based
on the Encoder Angle setting) to position the card for Encoding.
9 The Encoder/Flipper Feed Motor activates until the Card passes the Encoding
TOF Sensor.
10 The Encoding Feed Motor feeds the Card back to the Flipper Table while the
Magnetic Encoding Head transfers data onto the Magnetic Stripe.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY FARGO Electronic, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) viii
Reviewing the DTC 525 Sequence of Operations (continued)
Step
Process
11 Repeat Steps 9 to 10 for each Encoding and Verification pass.
12 The Card is centered on the Flipper Table based on input from the Flipper Table
Card Sensor.
13 The Flipper Stepper rotates the Flipper Table a specific number of steps (based on
the Flipper Offset setting) to the Home the Flipper Table.
14 The Card Feed Motor feeds the Card to the Print TOF Sensor.
15 The Ribbon Drives turn ON and move until the correct panel is found by the Print
Ribbon Sensor Array (5 reflective). All Stop. (Note: The Print Ribbon Encoder is
active during this step.)
16 The Headlift Motor engages and moves the printhead down until the Headlift
Sensor is activated. All Stop.
17 The Fan turns ON (as required) and blows cool air over the Printhead.
(Note: The Printhead Thermistor determinates the Printhead Temperature.)
18 Ribbon Drive and Card feed Motors activate and the printhead burns image data
until the image data is depleted. All Stop. (Note: The Ribbon Encoder is active
during this step.)
19 The Headlift Motor engages, moving the printhead up until the Headlift Sensor is
activated. All Stop.
20 The Card Feed Motor feeds the Card back to the Print TOF Sensor.
21 Repeat steps 14 to 20 for the appropriate Number of Color/Overlay Panels.
22 The Card Feed Motor transports the Card back to the Flipper Table.
23 The Flipper Stepper rotates in order to invert the Card.
24 The Card Feed Motor activates and moves the card to the Print TOF Sensor. All
Stop.
25 The Flipper Stepper rotates to return the Flipper Table to a level position.
26 Repeat Steps 14 to 20 for the appropriate Number of Color/Overlay Panels.
27 The Card Feed Motor activates to feed the Card out of the Printer.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY FARGO Electronic, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) ix
Reviewing the DTC 520 Sequence of Operations
The following sequence describes a DTC525 doing a dual sided full color print job with
magnetic encoding.
Step
Process
1 The File information is received from the PC.
2 The Flipper Stepper activates and rotates the Flipper Table until the Flipper Home
Sensor detects a change in state.
3 The Flipper Stepper rotates the Flipper Table back a specific number of steps
(based on the Flipper Offset setting) to return the Flipper Table to a level position.
4 The Card Detection Sensor detects for the presence of a Card in the exception
feed.
5 The Hopper Lift Motor activates and lowers the Card Hopper until the Hopper Lift
Sensor detects a change in state.
6 The Card Detection Sensor detects the presence of a Card.
7 The Card Feed Stepper activates and feeds a card through the Cleaning Roller
and onto the Flipper Table.
8 The Flipper Stepper rotates the Flipper Table a specific number of steps (based on
the Encoder Angle setting) to position the card for Encoding.
9 The Encoder/Flipper Feed Motor activates until the Card passes the Encoding
TOF Sensor.
10 The Encoding Feed Motor feeds the Card back to the Flipper Table while the
Magnetic Encoding Head transfers data onto the Magnetic Stripe.
11 Repeat Steps 9 to 10 for each Encoding and Verification pass.
12 The Card is centered on the Flipper Table based on input from the Flipper Table
Card Sensor.
14 The Card Feed Motor feeds the Card to the Print TOF Sensor.
15 The Ribbon Drives turn ON and move until the correct panel is detected by the
Print Ribbon Sensor Array (5 reflective). All Stop. (Note: The Print Ribbon
Encoder is active during this step.)
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY FARGO Electronic, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) x
Reviewing the DTC 520 Sequence of Operations (continued)
Step
Process
16 The Headlift Motor engages and moves the Printhead down until the Headlift
Sensor detects a change in state. All Stop.
17 The Fan turns ON (as required) and blows cool air on the Printhead.
(Note: The Printhead Thermistor determines the Printhead Temperature.)
18 Ribbon Drive and Card feed Motors activate and the printhead burns image data
until the image data is depleted. All Stop. (Note: The Ribbon Encoder is active
during this step.)
19 The Headlift Motor engages, moving the printhead up until the Headlift Sensor is
activated. All Stop.
20 The Card Feed Motor feeds the Card back to the Print TOF Sensor.
21 Repeat Steps 14 to 20 for the appropriate Number of Color/Overlay Panels.
22 The Card Feed Motor transports the Card back to the Flipper Table.
23 The Flipper Stepper rotates to invert the Card.
24 The Card Feed Motor activates and moves the Card to the Print TOF Sensor. All
Stop.
25 The Flipper Stepper rotates to return the Flipper Table to a level position.
26 Repeat steps 14 to 20 for the appropriate Number of Color/Overlay Panels.
27 The Card Feed Motor activates to feed the Card out of the Printer.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY FARGO Electronic, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) xi
Reviewing the DTC 515 Sequence of Operations
The following sequence describes a DTC515 doing a full color print job with magnetic
encoding.
Step
Process
1 The File information is received from the PC.
2 The Flipper Stepper activates and rotates the Flipper Table until the Flipper Home
Sensor detects a change in state.
3 The Flipper Stepper rotates the Flipper Table back a specific number of steps
(based on the Flipper Offset setting) to return the Flipper Table to a level position.
4 The Card Detection Sensor detects for the presence of a Card in the exception
feed.
5 The Hopper Lift Motor activates and lowers the Card Hopper until the Hopper Lift
Sensor detects a change in state.
6 Card detection sensor detects for the presence of a card.
If no card is seen, the following takes place:
a. The Hopper Lift Motor activates and raises the card Hopper until the Hopper
Lift Sensor detects a change in state.
b. The Hopper Transport motor activates and move to the other Hopper until the
Hopper Position Sensor detects a change in state.
c. The Hopper Lift Motor activates and lowers the Card Hopper until the Hopper
Lift Sensor detects a change in state.
d. The Card Detection Sensor detects for the presence of a Card.
7 The Card Feed Stepper activates and feeds a Card through the Cleaning Roller
and onto the Flipper Table.
8 The Flipper Stepper rotates the Flipper Table a specific number of steps (based on
the Encoder Angle setting) to position the Card for Encoding.
9 The Encoder/Flipper Feed Motor activates until the Card passes the Encoding
TOF Sensor.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY FARGO Electronic, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) xii
Reviewing the DTC 515 Sequence of Operations (continued)
Step
Process
10 The Encoding Feed Motor feeds the Card back to the Flipper Table while the
Magnetic Encoding Head transfers the data onto the Magnetic Stripe.
11 Repeat Steps 9 to 10 for each Encoding and Verification pass.
12 The Card is centered on the Flipper Table based on input from the Flipper Table
Card Sensor.
13 The Flipper Stepper rotates the Flipper Table a certain number of steps (based on
the Flipper Offset setting) to return the Flipper Table to a level position.
14 The Card Feed Motor feeds card to the Print TOF Sensor.
15 The Ribbon Drives turn ON and move until the correct panel is found by the Print
Ribbon Sensor Array (5 reflective). All Stop. (Note: The Print Ribbon Encoder is
active during this step.)
16 The Headlift Motor engages and moves the Printhead down until the Headlift
Sensor is activated. All Stop.
17 The Fan turns ON (as required) and blows cool air on the Printhead.
(Note: The Printhead Thermistor determines the Printhead Temperature.)
18 The Ribbon Drive and Card Feed Motors activate and the Printhead burns the
image data until the image data is depleted. All Stop. (Note: The Ribbon Encoder
is active during this step.)
19 The Headlift Motor engages and moves the Printhead up until the Headlift Sensor
detects a change in state. All Stop.
20 The Card Feed Motor feeds the Card back to the Print TOF Sensor.
21 Repeat Steps 14 to 20 for the appropriate Number of Color/Overlay Panels.
22 The Card Feed Motor activates to feed the Card out of the Printer.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY FARGO Electronic, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) xiii
Reviewing the DTC500-LE/DTC 510 Sequence of
Operations
The following sequence describes a DTC510 doing a full color print job with magnetic
encoding.
Step
Process
1 The File information is received from the PC.
2 The Flipper Stepper activates and rotates the Flipper Table until the Flipper Home
Sensor detects a change in state.
3 The Flipper Stepper rotates the Flipper Table back a specific number of steps
(Based on the Flipper Offset setting) to return the Flipper Table to a level position.
4 The Card Detection Sensor detects the presence of a Card in the exception feed.
5 The Hopper Lift Motor activates and lowers the Card Hopper until the Hopper Lift
Sensor detects a change in state.
6 The Card Detection Sensor detects for the presence of a card.
7 The Card Feed Stepper activates and feeds a Card through the Cleaning Roller
and onto the Flipper Table.
8 The Flipper Stepper rotates the Flipper Table a specific number of steps (based on
the Encoder Angle setting) to position the card for Encoding.
9 The Encoder/Flipper Feed Motor activates until the card passes the Encoding TOF
Sensor.
10 The Encoding Feed Motor feeds card back to the flipper table while the Magnetic
Encoding Head transfers data onto the Magnetic Stripe.
11 Repeat Steps 9 to 10 for each encoding/verification pass.
12 The Card is centered on the Flipper Table based on input from the Flipper Table
Card Sensor.
13 The Flipper Stepper rotates the Flipper Table a specific number of steps (based on
the Flipper Offset setting) to return the Flipper Table to a level position.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY FARGO Electronic, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) xiv
Reviewing the DTC500-LE/DTC 510 Sequence of Operations (continued)
Step
Process
14 The Card Feed Motor feeds card to the Print TOF Sensor.
15 The Ribbon Drives turn ON and move until the correct panel is found by the Print
Ribbon Sensor Array (5 reflective). All Stop. (Note: The Print Ribbon Encoder is
active during this step.)
16 The Headlift Motor engages and moves the Printhead down until the Headlift
Sensor is activated. All Stop.
17 The Fan turns ON (as required) and blows cool air over the Printhead.
(Note: The Printhead Thermistor determines the Printhead Temperature.)
18 The Ribbon Drive and Card Feed Motors activate and the Printhead burns the
image data until the image data is depleted. All Stop. (Note: The Ribbon
Encoder is active during this step.)
19 The Headlift Motor engages and moves the Printhead up until the Headlift Sensor
is activated. All Stop.
20 The Card Feed Motor feeds card back to the Print TOF Sensor.
21 Repeat steps 14 to 20 for the appropriate Number of Color/Overlay Panels.
22 The Card Feed Motor activates to feed the Card out of the Printer.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY FARGO Electronic, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) xv
Reviewing the DTC500 Boot up Sequence
Step Process
1 The Printer checks the installed memory in the Printer.
2 The Printers Firmware is initialized.
3 The Headlift Motor activates and cycles the Printhead one full rotation.
4 The Encoding Feed Motor activates and the Magnetic TOF Sensor checks for
the presence of a Card.
4 The Hopper Transport Motor activates until the Hopper Position Sensor detects
a change in state.
5 The Print Ribbon moves forward until it finds the panel, pauses, advances to
magenta, then backs up to yellow (where the Ribbon Sensor detects marks in
the ribbon.
6 The Hopper Lift Motor activates and raises the Hopper until the Hopper Lift
Sensor detects a change in state.
7 The Card Feed Motor activates to clear any Cards from the Card path.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY FARGO Electronic, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) xvi
Reviewing the Lamination Module Sequence of
Operations
The LAM sequence of operations begins after printing has occurred with the Card Printer.
Step
Process
1 The card is fed onto the Lamination Module Flipper Table.
2 The card is fed to the Card Position Sensor.
3 The Lamination Ribbon Motor begins cycling until the Upper Lamination Sensor
detects the mark.
4 The Card Feed Motor activates to center the card on the Platen Roller.
5 The Lamination Roller Lift Motor cycles until the Lamination Roller Lift Sensor
detects state change.
Continued on the next page
Lamination
Top Cover
Securing
Latches
Lamination Station
Lamination
LED Light
Cancel
Button
Resume
(pause) Button
Rejection
Card Hopper
Card Output
Hopper
RESTRICTED USE ONLY FARGO Electronic, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) xvii
Reviewing the Lamination Module Sequence of Operations (continued)
Step
Process
6 The Card Feed Motor and the Lamination Ribbon Motor activate for the length of
the card.
7 The Lamination Roller Lift Motor cycles until Lamination Roller Lift Sensor detects
state change.
8 The card is fed back to the Flipper Table.
9 The Flipper Table Clutch engages.
10 The Flipper Table Motor activates until the Card is inverted based on the Flipper
offset setting.
11 The Flipper Table Clutch disengages.
12 The card is fed off the Flipper Table.
13 The Flipper Table Clutch engages.
14 The Flipper Table Motor activates until the Flipper Table is homed.
15 The Flipper Table Clutch disengages.
16 Repeat Steps 2 through 7.
17 The card is fed out of the Printer.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY FARGO Electronic, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) xviii
Reviewing the Lamination Module Boot up Sequence
Step Process
1 The Lamination Headlift turns until head up position is returned from Headlift
Sensor.
2 The Lamination Ribbon motor activates to determine the presence of a roll of
lamination.
3 The Lamination Flipper table homes itself.
4 The Card sensor checks for the presence of a card and ejects it if found.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 1
Table of Contents
Section 1: Specifications_________________________________________________________ 6
Reviewing the DTC500 Series Printers Overview table ________________________________________6
Regulatory Compliances ________________________________________________________________7
Agency Listings_______________________________________________________________________8
Technical Specifications ________________________________________________________________8
Functional Specifications ______________________________________________________________13
Printer Components: LCD display to Parallel Interface Port_________________________________15
Printer Components: LCD and Softkey Control Pad_______________________________________19
Printer Components: Centronics-Type Parallel Interface ___________________________________24
Printer Components: Print Ribbons____________________________________________________25
Printer Components: Embedded Fonts and Bar Codes _____________________________________25
Printer Components: Blank Cards _____________________________________________________26
Reviewing the upgraded 81754 PVC Cards ______________________________________________27
Printer Components: Card Input and Output Hoppers______________________________________29
Printer Components: Lamination Roller ________________________________________________30
Reviewing the Card Lamination Module __________________________________________________31
Determining the Ready Status of the Card Lamination Module_______________________________32
Reviewing the Lamination Top Cover and Station_________________________________________33
Reviewing the Securing Latches and Lamination LED light _________________________________34
Reviewing the Cancel button _________________________________________________________35
Reviewing the Resume (pause) button __________________________________________________36
Reviewing the Rejection Card Hopper and Card Output Hopper______________________________37
Reviewing the Module and Printer interaction ____________________________________________38
Reviewing the Module and LCD display interaction _______________________________________39
Reviewing the Module’s Programmed Default Temperature_________________________________40
Reviewing the Laminator Temperature Adjustment________________________________________41
Reviewing the Overlaminates ___________________________________________________________42
Reviewing the Thermal Transfer Film and PolyGuard Overlaminates__________________________42
Reviewing the CR-90 or CR-100 Patch Size _____________________________________________43
Reviewing the Overlaminate Design ___________________________________________________43
Reviewing the Visual Security Solutions __________________________________________________44
VeriMarkTM Cards - 2-D holographic foil application _____________________________________44
Custom HoloMarkTM Cards _________________________________________________________44
Visual Security - Card Stock Part Numbers ______________________________________________44
Visual Security - Fargo Certified Overlaminates (Special Order in 50 quantity minimum)__________44
Visual Security Card Stock - Tolerances ________________________________________________45
VeriMarkTM - Application Specifications_______________________________________________45
HoloMarkTM and Custom HoloMarkTM - Application Specifications ________________________45
Section 2: General Troubleshooting ______________________________________________ 46
Reviewing the LCD display and LED light_________________________________________________46
Troubleshooting the LCD Messages____________________________________________________46
Verifying the Encoding Settings for DTC500 Series Card Printer and Encoders__________________53
Verifying Encoder Settings for DTC 510/DTC 515 (Symptom A) ____________________________54
Verifying Encoder Settings for DTC 510/DTC 515 (Symptom B) ____________________________54
Verifying the Encoding Settings for the DTC 520/DTC 525 _________________________________58
Communications Errors________________________________________________________________62
Resolving the Communication Errors___________________________________________________62
Card Feeding Errors __________________________________________________________________67
Resolving the Card Feeding Errors_____________________________________________________67
Resolving the Card Jam on the Flipper Table_____________________________________________70
Resolving the Card Hopper Jam Error Message___________________________________________72
Resolving the Card Hopper Empty Error Message_________________________________________73
Encoding Errors______________________________________________________________________74
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 2
Resolving the No Magnetic Encoder Error Message _______________________________________74
Resolving the No ENC Response Error Message__________________________________________74
Resolving the Failed Magnetic Encode Error Message _____________________________________75
Resolving the No Prox Encoder Error Message ___________________________________________75
Resolving the No Smart Encoder Error Message __________________________________________76
Resolving the Failed Smart Encode Error Message ________________________________________76
Removing the Card Jam in the Printer’s Magnetic Encoding Area ____________________________77
Removing the Card Jam in the Printer’s Smart Card Encoding Area___________________________78
Resolving the Printer not reading Encoded Magnetic Track Data _____________________________79
Resolving the Magnetic Stripe Data being printed on a Card problem _________________________81
Printing Process Errors ________________________________________________________________82
Resolving the Ribbon Alignment Error Message __________________________________________82
Resolving the Print Ribbon Error Message ______________________________________________83
Resolving the Print Ribbon Out Error Message ___________________________________________83
Resolving the Ribbon Jam/Broke Error Message__________________________________________83
Resolving the Wrong Print Ribbon Error Message ________________________________________84
Resolving the Unknown Ribbon Type Error Message ______________________________________85
Resolving the Headlift Error Message __________________________________________________86
Resolving the Printer pausing between panels error________________________________________87
Resolving the Printhead Temp Error Message ____________________________________________88
Resolving the Flipper Alignment Error Message __________________________________________89
Firmware Errors _____________________________________________________________________90
Resolving the Update Firmware Now __________________________________________________90
Resolving an Upgrade Failed error_____________________________________________________90
Resolving a Program Exception Error __________________________________________________93
Diagnosing the Image Problems _________________________________________________________94
Resolving the Pixel failure problems ___________________________________________________94
Resolving the Card surface debris problems _____________________________________________97
Resolving the incorrect Image Darkness problems _______________________________________100
Resolving the Ribbon wrinkle problems _______________________________________________103
Resolving the excessive Resin Printing problems ________________________________________105
Resolving the incomplete Resin Printing problems _______________________________________107
Resolving the cut off or off-center Card Image problems __________________________________109
Resolving the poor Image Quality problems ____________________________________________110
Printing a Test Image ________________________________________________________________111
Reviewing the Gray/Align YMC/K Self-Test ___________________________________________111
Reviewing the Color/Resin YMCK Self-Test ___________________________________________112
Reviewing the Color Bars YMC Self-Test______________________________________________112
Reviewing the Card Count Self-Test __________________________________________________113
Reviewing the Magnetic Test option __________________________________________________113
Section 3: Card Lamination Module ____________________________________________ 114
Safety Messages (review carefully)______________________________________________________114
Loading the Overlaminate_____________________________________________________________115
Adjusting the Card Lamination Module __________________________________________________118
Adjusting the Card Flattener_________________________________________________________118
Adjusting the Card Guide Rail _______________________________________________________120
Adjusting the Internal Card Guide ____________________________________________________124
Attaching the Card Lamination Module ________________________________________________126
Section 4: Printer Adjustments_________________________________________________ 132
Safety Messages (review carefully)______________________________________________________132
Adjusting the Internal Card Guide ____________________________________________________133
Printer Driver options ________________________________________________________________135
Using the Device options tab___________________________________________________________135
Adjusting for the Ribbon Type_______________________________________________________136
Adjusting for the Color matching_____________________________________________________137
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 3
Adjusting for the Resin Dither _______________________________________________________138
Using the Print Both Sides option (DTC520/DTC525 only) ________________________________139
Using the Split 1 Set of Ribbon Panels option (DTC520/DTC525 only)_______________________140
Using the Print Back Side First option _________________________________________________141
Using the Print on Back Side Only option (DTC520/DTC525 only)__________________________142
Using the Rotate Front by 180 Degrees option___________________________________________143
Using the Rotate Back by 180 Degrees option (DTC520/DTC525 only)_______________________144
Using the Buffer Single Card option __________________________________________________145
Using the Link Card to Print Job option________________________________________________146
Using the Disable Printing option_____________________________________________________147
Using the Image Color tab_____________________________________________________________148
Using the K Panel Resin tab ___________________________________________________________152
Selecting the Full Card with the K Panel Resin tab _______________________________________153
Selecting the Defined Area(s) with the K Panel Resin tab __________________________________154
Selecting the Undefined Area(s) with the K Panel Resin tab ________________________________155
Defining the Area to activate the Card Grid_____________________________________________156
Measuring the Total Card area _______________________________________________________157
Defining the positioning of the area on the Card _________________________________________159
Selecting the Print YMC under the K and Print K Only options _____________________________161
Using the Magnetic Encoding tab _______________________________________________________163
Using the Encoding Mode option_____________________________________________________164
Encoding the Mode/Coercivity/Magnetic Track Selection__________________________________166
Using the Magnetic Track Selection option _____________________________________________168
Reviewing the Enable MLE Support checkbox __________________________________________169
Using the Magnetic Track options ____________________________________________________170
Using the Bit Density radio buttons ___________________________________________________171
Using the Character Size radio buttons_________________________________________________171
Using the ASCII Offset ____________________________________________________________172
Using the LRC Generation radio buttons _______________________________________________173
Using the Character Parity radio buttons _______________________________________________173
Using the Verification option ________________________________________________________174
Reviewing the Shift Data Left _______________________________________________________175
Reviewing the ISO Track Locations___________________________________________________176
Reviewing the Sample String ________________________________________________________176
Sending the Track Information_______________________________________________________177
Reviewing the ASCII Code and Character Table_________________________________________178
Using the Overlay/Print Area tab _______________________________________________________179
Using the Overlay/Print Area dropdown menu __________________________________________180
Using the Overlay/Print Area ________________________________________________________181
Using Security Options (Visual Security Solutions)_______________________________________187
Selecting Orientation - Landscape under Card tab ________________________________________188
Selecting the Visual Security Solutions dropdown menu (A to D) ___________________________189
Selecting Orientation - Portfolio under Card tab _________________________________________190
Selecting the Visual Security Solutions dropdown menu (E to H)____________________________191
Selecting the VeriMark radio button __________________________________________________192
Selecting the HoloMark radio button __________________________________________________193
Reviewing the Custom VeriMark Card ________________________________________________194
Reviewing the Custom HoloMark Card ________________________________________________195
Using SmartShield Area dropdown menu ______________________________________________196
Using the Card tab___________________________________________________________________197
Selecting the Card Size_____________________________________________________________198
Using the Card Hopper Selection (DTC515/DTC525 only) option ___________________________200
Reviewing the Orientation __________________________________________________________203
Specifying the Copies______________________________________________________________203
Using the Test Print button__________________________________________________________204
Clicking on the About button ________________________________________________________205
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 4
Using the Image Position button______________________________________________________206
Using the Lamination tab (only with Card Lamination Module) _______________________________209
Selecting the Lamination Position ____________________________________________________210
Selecting the Lamination Side _______________________________________________________211
Selecting the Lamination Type_______________________________________________________212
Selecting the Lamination Type_______________________________________________________213
Adjusting the Transfer Dwell Time and Transfer Temperature ______________________________214
Selecting the Sensors button and Defaults button_________________________________________214
Calibrating the Card Lamination Module’s Lamination Sensor______________________________215
Section 5: Cleaning___________________________________________________________ 216
Safety Messages (review carefully)______________________________________________________216
Cleaning the Printhead (850102) _____________________________________________________217
Replacing the Card Cleaning Tape____________________________________________________218
Cleaning the Platen and Card Feed Rollers _____________________________________________220
Cleaning the Platen________________________________________________________________223
Cleaning the Printer's Exterior _______________________________________________________224
Cleaning the Printer's Interior________________________________________________________224
Cleaning the Magnetic Encoder ______________________________________________________226
Section 6: Packing the DTC500 Card Printer _____________________________________ 229
Section 7: Board Level Diagnostics ______________________________________________ 230
Board Errors _______________________________________________________________________230
Resolving the EE Memory Error _____________________________________________________230
Resolving the EE Checksum Error____________________________________________________230
Resolving the DRAM Memory Error__________________________________________________231
Resolving the RAM Memory Error ___________________________________________________231
Resolving the FPGA Error __________________________________________________________231
Sensor Testing______________________________________________________________________232
Reviewing the Sensor Location and Voltages ___________________________________________233
Reviewing the Sensor Layout on Ribbon Sensor array ____________________________________234
Section 8: LCD On-Line Menu Navigation _______________________________________ 235
Entering the LCD Menu and selecting an Option ___________________________________________235
Using the Softkey and Scroll buttons __________________________________________________236
Accessing the Menu Option Structure Tree________________________________________________236
Selecting from the Menu Option Structure Tree__________________________________________237
Using the LCD Menu ________________________________________________________________238
Printing the Self-test_______________________________________________________________238
Reviewing the Gray/Align YMC (DTC510/515) and Gray/Align YMC/K (DTC520/525) Self-Test _239
Reviewing the Color/Resin YMCK Self-Test ___________________________________________239
Reviewing the Card Count YMC Self-Test _____________________________________________240
Reviewing the Standard Resin Self-Test _______________________________________________240
Using the Magnetic Test option (only with Magnetic Encoding Module) ______________________241
Setting up the Printer ______________________________________________________________241
Print TOF and Print EOF Alignment Procedures ___________________________________________242
Preparing to Adjust the Print TOF and Print EOF ________________________________________243
Setting the Print TOF ______________________________________________________________243
Setting the Print EOF ______________________________________________________________244
Adjusting the Ribbon Tension _______________________________________________________246
Setting the Printhead Resistance______________________________________________________247
Adjusting the Image Darkness _______________________________________________________248
Changing the Encoder Settings_______________________________________________________249
Adjusting the Magnetic TOF ________________________________________________________250
Changing the Hopper Settings _______________________________________________________252
Changing the BAUD Rate Settings ___________________________________________________253
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 5
Adjusting the Flipper Offset _________________________________________________________253
Viewing the Report Supplies ________________________________________________________254
Using the Show the Error Count Tool _________________________________________________254
Showing the Card Count____________________________________________________________255
Selecting the System Upgrade (Firmware Upgrade) ______________________________________255
Section 9: Firmware Updates __________________________________________________ 256
Firmware Updater Application Program__________________________________________________256
Downloading Firmware Updates________________________________________________________258
Updating the Printer's Firmware ________________________________________________________259
Updating the Main Firmware ________________________________________________________259
Updating the LCD Firmware ________________________________________________________262
Section 10: DTC500 Enhancement Kit Instructions Overview _______________________ 264
Reviewing the Parts (included with the Kit; 1 set per Card Printer)___________________________264
Reviewing the required Tools________________________________________________________265
Reviewing the required Media supplies ________________________________________________265
Updating the Process Strategy__________________________________________________________266
Determining the Card Printer qualifications for the Update _________________________________266
Unpacking the Card Printer _________________________________________________________267
Removing the Printer's main plastic casing _____________________________________________268
Inspecting the Drive Pulley _________________________________________________________269
Installing the Push-Clip onto the Drive Roller ___________________________________________271
Removing and installing the Card Feed Roller (D850415) _________________________________272
Installing the Sensor Holder _________________________________________________________274
Installing the new Card Input Hopper in the single Hopper units (DTC510/520) ________________277
Installing the new Card Input Hopper in the dual Hopper units (DTC515/525)__________________280
Applying the Close Door While Printing Label (L000188) _________________________________283
Applying the Ribbon Loading Label (L000108) _________________________________________284
Replacing the plastic Printer casing ___________________________________________________285
Powering up the Unit and confirming its Ready status_____________________________________286
Upgrading the Firmware to Version 1.5.1 ______________________________________________287
Confirming the Printer operations ____________________________________________________290
Removing the Media from the Printer _________________________________________________298
Repackaging the Printer ____________________________________________________________298
Section 11: Fargo Technical Support ____________________________________________ 300
Contacting Fargo Technical Support_____________________________________________________300
Reading the Serial Numbers on a Fargo printer ____________________________________________301
Finding out when a Fargo Card Printer was manufactured _________________________________301
Reviewing Example No. 1: Serial Number 80453289_____________________________________301
Reviewing Example No. 2: Serial Number A1280224 ____________________________________301
Section 12: Reviewing Spare Parts Lists _________________________________________ 302
Reviewing the Spare Parts List for DTC500 Series Card Printer _____________________________302
Reviewing the Spare Parts List for the DTC500 LAM_____________________________________302
Glossary of Terms ____________________________________________________________ 303
Index_______________________________________________________________________ 323
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 6
Section 1: Specifications
The purpose of this section is to provide the User with specific information on the Regulatory
Compliances, Agency Listings, Technical Specifications and Functional Specifications for the
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0).
Reviewing the DTC500 Series Printers Overview
table
DTC500 Series Input
Hoppers
Card
Capacity Security Encoding
Modules Lamination
Module
DTC510 (Single-Sided
Card Printer/Encoders) 1 100 N/A Optional N/A
DTC515 (Single-Sided
Card Printer/Encoders) 2 200 Included Optional Optional
DTC515-LC (Single-
Sided Card
Printer/Encoders)
2 200 Included Optional Included
DTC520 (Dual-Sided
Card Printer/Encoders) 2 100 N/A Optional N/A
DTC525 (Dual-Sided
Card Printer/Encoders) 2 200 Included Optional Optional
DTC525-LC (Dual-
Sided Card
Printer/Encoders)
2 200 Included Optional Included
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 7
Regulatory Compliances
Term Description
CSA The Printer manufacturer has been authorized by UL to represent the
Card Printer as CSA Certified under CSA Standard 22.2.
File Number: E145118
FCC The Card Printer complies with the requirements in Part 15 of the FCC
rules for a Class B digital device. (Note: These requirements are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
in a residential installation.)
If equipment operation in a residential area causes unacceptable
interference to radio and TV reception, the operator is required to take
whatever steps are necessary to correct the interference.
ITS-EMC The Card Printer has been tested and complies with EN55022 Class B:
1995 and EN82082-1: 1997 standards for EMI emissions.
(Note: Based on the above testing, the Printer manufacturer certifies
that the Card Printer complies with all current EMC directives of the
European Community and has placed the CE mark on the Card
Printer.)
License Number: J99032510
TÜV-GS The Card Printer has been tested and complies with IEC950 and bears
the TÜV-GS mark.
License Number: S9971826
UL The Card Printer is listed under UL 1950 INFORMATION
TECHNOLOGY EQUIPMENT.
File Number: E145118, Volume 1, Section 15
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 8
Agency Listings
Term Description
Emissions
Standards EMC: ITS (EN 55022 Class B:1995), FCC Class B, EN 50082-1:1997,
BSMI, CRC c1374, CE and CCIB
Safety
Standards UL 1950, CSA C2.2 (No.950-95) and TüV-GS (IEC-950), CE and
CCIB.
Technical Specifications
Term Description
Accepted
Standard Card
Size
CR-79 Adhesive Back: 3.303 in. x 2.051 in. (83.9mm x 52.1mm)
(cannot be laminated with DTC515-LC or DTC525-LC)
CR-80: 3.375 in. x 2.125 in. (85.6mm x 54mm) (corresponds to ID1)
Accepted Card
Thickness .010 in. (10 mil) to .050 in. (50 mil) (.254mm to 1.27mm); unless
laminating.
Accepted Card
Types HID Proximity Cards, Mifare Contactless Smart Cards and Contact
Smart Cards
Accepted Card
Compositions PVC or polyester cards with polished PVC finish; monochrome resin
required for 100% polyester cards.
Barcodes Code 39, Code 128 B & C with and without check digit (available with
embedded font and bar code option): 2 of 5, UPC-A, EAN 13 and
PDF-417 2D bar code and other symbologies (available via Windows
driver).
Card Input
Hopper Capacity
DTC510/520: Single-stack hopper, 100 cards (30 mil); auto or
manual feed
DTC515/525: Dual-stack hopper, 200 cards (30 mil); auto or
manual feed
DTC515-LC/525-LC: Dual Hopper; 200 cards (.030”); auto or
manual feed
Card Output
Hopper Capacity 100 cards (30 mil)
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 9
Technical Specifications (continued)
Term Description
Card Cleaning Removable card cleaning cartridge with replaceable cleaning tape.
Colors Up to 16.7 million colors and 256 shades per pixel.
Dimensions DTC510/515/520/525: 10.75 in. H x 18.5 in. W x 11 in. D (273mm x
470mm x 279mmD).
DTC515-LC/525-LC: 10.75 in. H x 30.5 in. W x 11 in. D (273mm x
775mm x 279mmD).
LC Module: 10.25” H x 30” W x 11”D/260mm H x 762mm W x
279mmD
Display SmartScreen LCD Control Panel; LED display on Card Lamination
Module.
Fonts Resident Swiss Bold 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18 and 22 are available with
embedded font and bar code option.
TrueType fonts are available via the Windows driver.
Humidity 20% to 80% Non-Condensing.
Interface Centronics Parallel, IEEE 1284 compliant
Optional EIA-232C serial interface (for embedded fonts and bar
codes option)
Optional USB-to-Parallel Interface Cable (Windows
98/Me/2000/XP)
Memory 4 MB RAM
Operating
Temperature 65ºF to 80ºF (18ºC to 27ºC).
Print Area CR-80 edge-to-edge: (3.37 in. x 2.12 in./85.5mm x 53.5mm)
CR-79: (3.3 in. x 2.051 in./83.8mm x 52.1mm)
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 10
Technical Specifications (continued)
Term Description
Print Speed –
Batch Mode
DTC510/515: 7 seconds per card/514 cards per hour (K)*
DTC510/515: 12 seconds per card/300 cards per hour (BO)*
DTC510/515: 27 seconds per card/133 cards per hour
(YMCKO)*
DTC520/525: 35 seconds per card/102 cards per hour
(YMCKOK)*
DTC515-LC/525-LC: 30 seconds per card/133 cards per hour
(YMCK/lamination)*
DTC525-LC: 36 seconds per card /102 cards per hour
(YMCKK/lamination)*
*Indicates the print Ribbon type and the number of Ribbon panels
printed where Y=Yellow, M=Magenta, C=Cyan, K=Resin Black,
B=Dye-Sublimation Black and O=Overlay.
Print speeds do not include the time needed for the PC to process
the image.
Process time is dependent on the size of the file, the CPU,
amount of RAM and the amount of available resources at the time
of the print.
Print speed indicates an approximate batch print speed and is
measured from the time a card feeds into the Printer to the time it
ejects from the Printer. (Note: The single card print speeds will
be slower than the batch print speeds listed above since batch
print speed is enhanced by the Printer's multi-tasking capabilities
when printing multiple cards in succession.)
Printing Method Dye-Sublimation/Resin Thermal Transfer.
Overlaminate
Options (for LC) Thermal Transfer Overlaminate, .25 mil thick
PolyGuard Overlaminate, 1.0 mil and .6 mil thick
All overlaminates available in clear, holographic globe design or
custom holographic design
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 11
Technical Specifications (continued)
Term Description
Options Printer Cleaning Kit
External Print Server (Windows only; required for stand-alone
networking of printer/encoders)
Card Lamination Module (DTC515 and DTC525 only)
Embedded Fonts and Bar Codes to print from AS/400, mainframe
and other systems
o Code 39, Code 128 B & C with and without check digit
o 2 of 5
o UPC-A
o EAN 13
o PDF-417 2D bar code and other symbologies available via
Windows driver
o Resident: Swiss Bold 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18 and 22
Encoding Options ISO Magnetic Stripe Encoding Module, dual high- and low-
coercivity, Tracks 1, 2 and 3
JIS II Magnetic Stripe Encoding Module
E-Card Docking Station (required for all e-card options or 3rd party
Smart card encoding)
Contactless Smart Card Encoder (MIFARE)
Contact Smart Card Encoder reads from and writes to all
ISO7816-1/2/3/4 memory and microprocessor smart cards (T=0,
T=1) as well as synchronous cards
Prox Card Encoder (HID read-only); I class
Fargo Certified
Supplies Fargo Card Printer/Encoders require highly specialized media to
function properly. To maximize printed card quality, printhead life and
printer/encoder reliability, use only Fargo Certified Supplies. Fargo
warranties are void, where not prohibited by law, when non-Fargo
Certified Supplies are used.
Printing
Resolution Up to 16.7 million colors and 256 shades per pixel.
300 dpi (11.8 dots/mm)
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 12
Technical Specifications (continued)
Term Description
Print Ribbon
options
Full Color with resin black and overlay panel, YMCKO, 400 prints
Full Color with two resin black panels and overlay panel,
YMCKOK, 350 prints
Full Color, no resin black, no overlay panel, YMC, 700 prints,
must be used with overlaminate
Full Color with resin black, no overlay panel, YMCK, 500 prints,
must be used with overlaminate
Full Color with 2 resin black panels, no overlay panel, YMCKK,
400 prints, must be used with overlaminate
Dye-Sublimation black, BO, 500 prints
Resin black, green, blue, red, white, silver, gold, scratch-off, 1000
prints
Security Features SmartGuard, SmartShield, Card Hopper Lock (available only on
DTC515/525/515-LC/525-LC)
Software Drivers Windows 95/ 98/ ME/ NT/ 2000/XP; Optional Macintosh (not
available on the DTC515-LC/525-LC).
Supply Voltage DTC510/515/520: 100-240 VAC, 1.2A
DTC525/515-LC/525-LC: 100-240 VAC, 2.2A
Supply
Frequency 50 Hz/60 Hz.
System
Requirements IBM-PC or compatible. Windows 95/ 98/ ME/ NT/ 2000/XP. Pentium™
class 133 MHz computer with 32 MB of RAM or higher, 200 MB free
hard disk space or higher and ECP Parallel Port with DMA access.
Warranty Printer – One year; optional Extended Warranty Program (U.S. only)
Printhead – One year, unlimited pass with UltraCard Cards
Weight DTC510/515/520/525: 24 lbs. (10.8 kg).
DTC515-LC/DTC525-LC: 43 lbs./19.5kg
LC Module: 19 lbs./8.6 kg.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 13
Functional Specifications
The card Printer utilizes two different, yet closely related printing technologies to achieve its
direct-to-card print quality for Dye-Sublimation and resin thermal transfer. The card Printer
will print from any IBM-PC® or compatible running Windows® 95/98/Me, Windows NT 4.0,
Windows 2000 or Windows XP.
The following describes how each of these technologies works:
Function Description
Dye-
Sublimation Dye-Sublimation is the print method the card Printer uses to produce
smooth, continuous-tone images that look photographic. (Note: This
process uses a dye-based Ribbon roll that is partitioned by a number of
consecutive color panels.)
Process Colors: The panels are grouped in a repeating Series of
three process colors - yellow, magenta and cyan (YMC), along the
entire length of the print Ribbon.
Panels: The Printer always prints the yellow panel first, followed by the
magenta panel and the cyan panel.
Printhead: As the print Ribbon passes beneath the Printhead,
hundreds of thermal elements within the Printhead heat the dyes on the
Ribbon. (Note: When these dyes are heated, they vaporize and diffuse
into the surface of the card. A separate pass is made for each of the
three color panels on the Ribbon.)
Color Shades: By combining the colors of each panel and by varying
the heat used to transfer these colors, it is possible to print up to 16.7
million different shades of color. (Note: This blends one color smoothly
into the next, producing photo-quality images with absolutely no dot
pattern.)
Dye-Diffusion Thermal Transfer: It is the process of heating a dye
suspended in a cellulous substrate until the dye can flow, diffusing into
the dye receptive surface of the card or InTM. This produces the image
in the surface of the card.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 14
Functional Specifications (continued)
Function Description
Resin
Thermal
Transfer
Resin Thermal Transfer is the print method the Printer uses to print sharp
black text and crisp bar codes that can be read by both infrared and visible-
light bar code scanners.
Like Dye-Sublimation, this process uses the same thermal Printhead to
transfer color to a card from a resin-only print Ribbon or the resin black (K)
panel of a full color print Ribbon.
The difference, however, is that solid dots of resin-based ink are
transferred and fused to the surface of the card. (Note: This produces very
durable, saturated printing.)
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 15
Printer Components: LCD display to Parallel Interface Port
Component Description
Access Card
Slot The SmartGuard Access Card is inserted in this slot and is used with
the Printer's optional SmartGuard Security Feature.
Card Thickness
Adjustment
Lever
Adjusts the Printer to feed varying card thicknesses.
Card Cleaning
Cartridge Automatically cleans cards for higher print quality. (Note: Replace this
tape after every 3000 cards or as needed.)
Card Input
Hopper Load blank cards into this hopper.
Card Output
Hopper Stores printed cards; up to 100, 30 mil cards.
Card Supply
Window Check the current card supply at-a-glance, without having to open the
Card Hopper Door.
Card Input
Hopper Lock
If using the DTC515 or DTC525 Card Printer, this lock allows you to
lock the Card Input Hopper Door to help prevent the theft of blank
cards.
If using the DTC510 or DTC520 Card Printers, this lock is not
available.
Exception Card
Slot Insert a single exception card into this slot if you would like to print onto
a card other than those loaded in the Card Input Hopper.
LCD display Displays the current status of the Printer.
LED light Indicates Printer ON, OFF, pause and error conditions.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 16
Printer Components: LCD display to Serial Interface Port (continued)
Component Description
Printhead This Print Station component actually does the printing. (Note: This
component is fragile and must not be bumped or touched with anything
other than a cleaning pen.)
Power Switch This switch turns the Printer power ON and OFF.
Power Port This port connects to the (included) power cord.
Securing
Latches These latches lock the Print Station securely in place when closed.
Softkey Buttons The button function is displayed above the button. The buttons change
depending upon the Printer's mode of operation.
Power Port
Power Switch
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 17
Printer Components: LCD display to Serial Interface Port (continued)
Component Description
scroll buttons These buttons are used to scroll through menus and sub-menus and to
adjust certain menu options.
Parallel
Interface Port This port connects to a Windows PC with a parallel cable.
Serial Interface
Port For Smart Card option: This port is provided only if your Printer
includes an optional Smart Card Contact Station.
Serial Interface
Port For Embedded Fonts and Bar Codes option: This port is provided
only if your Printer includes optional embedded fonts and bar codes
support.
Continued on the next page
Parallel Interface Port
Serial Interface Port
(Smart Card option only)
Serial Interface Port
(Font / Bar Code option only)
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 18
Printer Components: LCD display to Serial Interface Port (continued)
Refer to the previous table.
LCD Display
LED Light
Softkey Buttons
Card Cleaning Cartridge
Card Supply Window
Card Input Hopper
Exception Card Slot
Card Thickness
Adjustment Lever
Card Output
Hopper
Print Station
Top Cover
Securing
Latches
Printhead
Access Card Slot
Card Input
Hopper Lock
Scroll Buttons
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 19
Printer Components: LCD and Softkey Control Pad
The Printer provides a four line, eighty (80) character LCD display that communicates helpful
information about the Printer's operation.
The top three lines of the LCD display will always be used to communicate print status,
error messages and menu options.
The bottom line of the LCD display will always be used to communicate the current
function of the Printer's softkey buttons.
This section describes how the LCD display and Softkey Control Pad work together.
Component Description
Softkey
Buttons The Printer has three softkey buttons that appear below the LCD
display. (Note: Their current function is indicated by the words
appearing above them. This function will change according to the
Printer's current mode of operation.)
Press the corresponding softkey button for the correct selection.
(Note: If no word appears above a particular button, this indicates it
has no function in that particular mode of operation.)
Use the scroll buttons to scroll through help text, to navigate through
the Printer's menus and to adjust certain Printer settings. (Note: The
Printer has scroll buttons on its control pad located just to the right of
the LCD display.)
If scrolling through a list, this symbol will change to if you have
reached the bottom of the list or if you have reached the top.
LCD display The Printer's LCD display will change according to the Printer's current
mode of operation.
System Check
Screens When the Printer is first powered ON, the Printer's system check screens
will briefly appear to:
Display and test the amount of installed Printer memory.
Align the print Ribbon.
Display the READY screen and current Firmware version.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 20
Printer Components: LCD and Softkey Control Pad (continued)
Component Description
Ready/Printer
Open Screens
Once the Printer has finished its system check and with the Print and
Transfer Stations closed, the Printer will display READY to indicate that
the Printer is ready for operation. (Note: The Printer will stay in this
mode until it receives a print job or it is turned OFF.)
If the Top cover and Printhead Arm are opened, the Printer Open screen
will appear.
Press either the Forward or Back buttons to move the Printer's card
path Rollers in the indicated direction.
In any of these screens, the Printer will always display the Menu option
above the center softkey button.
Press this button to access the Printer's menu options. (Note: The
Menu option is available only in the Ready/Printer Open screens.)
Print Status
Screen During operation, the LCD will indicate the current Print Status by
showing you the area of the Printer that is active. It does this by
displaying the following icons on the second line:
FDR Indicates the Feeder Station is feeding a blank card into the
Printer.
ENC Indicates the Encode Station is encoding a card (appears only if
you are using a Printer with an optional built-in Encoding Module).
PRT Indicates the Print Station is printing onto the film.
LAM indicates the Lamination Station is applying an overlaminate to a
card (appears only if using a Printer equipped with the optional Card
Lamination Module. See Section 3: Card Lamination Module on page
114.
Since the Printer is capable of performing several of these functions
simultaneously, one or all of these icons may appear at once, depending
on if you are printing just one card or a batch of cards.
The Print Status screen always displays Cancel in the lower left and
Pause in the lower right.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 21
Printer Components: LCD and Softkey Control Pad (continued)
Component Description
The Cancel
button Use this button to cancel print jobs and reset the Printer for the next print
job.
This Cancel function will cancel all print jobs in the Printer and will
completely reset the Printer. In this case, be sure to cancel the print
jobs from the PC before pressing YES.
Caution: To avoid this, select the Print in Single Card Mode
option from the Printer driver before sending the next print job. If a card is
left within the Printer after a print job is canceled, it will automatically be
ejected.
Pause button Use this button to pause the Printer at any time during operation. (Note:
The Printer will always finish its current task before pausing. When the
Printer is paused, the LED light will flash and the Pause softkey button
will change to Resume.)
Press Resume to continue Printer operation.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 22
Printer Components: LCD and Softkey Control Pad (continued)
Component Description
LED light This light works in conjunction with the Printer's LCD display to help
communicate the Printer's current status. (Note: It is especially effective
when the User is too far away from the Printer to read the LCD display.)
The following explains how to interpret both LED lights on the exterior of
the Printer.
Off: Indicates the Printer power is OFF.
Solid GREEN: Indicates the Printer is powered ON and ready for
operation.
Flashing GREEN: Indicates a Printer ERROR or ATTENTION
condition. (Note: Refer to the Printer's LCD display for information.)
Continued on the next page
LED Light
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 23
Printer Components: LCD and Softkey Control Pad (continued)
Component Description
Error Screens
Your Printer is capable of communicating two similar yet different types
of message screens:
The first is called an ERROR screen. This screen appears if an error
occurs and will completely stop Printer operation.
In this case, the LCD will display ERROR on the first line and a brief
description of the error on the second line.
If multiple errors occur at the same time, the first line will display
ERROR 1 of 2 or whatever the total number of errors may be.
To see the other error(s), use the scroll keys.
Press the HELP button to bring up the help screen explaining the
nature of the error and how to correct it. If necessary, use the scroll
buttons to scroll down the paragraph of help text.
Press QUIT when you are done reading. Once the error is corrected,
resume operation or reset the Printer according to how you were
instructed in the help screen.
Attention
Screens The second type of prompt is called an ATTENTION screen.
This screen will not stop Printer operation and serves to communicate
helpful reminder (e.g., when running low on print supplies).
This screen communicates any other Printer conditions of which you
should be aware.
In this case, the LCD will display ATTENTION on the first line and a brief
description of the condition on the second line.
If multiple messages need to be communicated at the same time, the
first line will display ATTENTION 1 of 2 or whatever the total number
of messages may be.
Like error messages, help text explaining the particular condition can
also be accessed by pressing the HELP button.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 24
Printer Components: Centronics-Type Parallel Interface
The card Printer is equipped with a standard 8-bit Centronics-type parallel interface port.
(Note: This communication port is the means through which the Printer receives data from
the computer. This section describes the pin assignments and signal specifications for this
port.)
If your Printer is equipped with optional embedded font and bar code support, it will
include a DB-9, RS-232c, male serial connector. This port is used only for applications
where the Printer will be connected to a terminal device such as an AS400.
If your Printer is equipped with an optional E-Card encoding Station, it will include a DB-
9, female serial connector. This port is used only for applications where the Printer will be
connected to an external Smart Card interface.
The Printer's parallel interface connector is a standard 36-pin Amp type with two metal-wire
retaining clips and is ECP (Extended Capabilities Port) compatible. (Note: It mates with a
standard, bi-directional PC to Printer parallel cable. For best results, keep the interface cable
to under 6 feet in length.)
WIRE DIAGRAM
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
11 11
12 12
13 13
14 14
32 15
31 16
36
36 18
17
19 Through 30
19 Through 25
Shell Shell
DB36P
19 PIN 1
PIN 1
DB25P
14
13
25
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 25
Printer Components: Print Ribbons
The card Printer utilizes both Dye-Sublimation and/or resin thermal transfer methods to print
images directly onto blank cards. Since the Dye-Sublimation and the resin thermal transfer
print methods (each) provide their own unique benefits, print Ribbons are available in resin-
only, Dye-Sublimation-only and combination Dye-Sublimation/resin versions.
This letter code indicates the type of Ribbon panel used with each Ribbon.
= Dye-Sublimation Yellow Panel
= Dye-Sublimation Magenta Panel
= Dye-Sublimation Cyan Panel
= Resin Black Panel
= Overlay Panel
Printer Components: Embedded Fonts and Bar Codes
The information in this section applies only if your Printer is configured with the embedded
fonts and bar codes option. See the DTC Online User’s Guide for additional information on
Embedded Fonts and Bar Codes.
This option provides select fonts and bar codes which are resident inside the Printer,
allowing you to print resin black text and bar codes directly from a terminal device such
as an AS400.
If printing from a standard Windows application, the included Printer driver supports any
TrueType font or bar code currently installed on your computer.
The existing and new Firmware updates for the DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders with
the Embedded Fonts and Bar Codes option (require Firmware Version 1.5.9) and without the
Embedded Fonts and Bar Codes option (require Firmware Version 2.0.0-b2) are described
here. See Technical Update No. 46 (dated 11/06/2002).
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders with Embedded Fonts and Bar Codes: The
latest version of Firmware supported by the Card Printer/Encoders is Firmware Version
1.5.9. (Technician Note: The Card Printer/Encoders will not support Firmware Version
2.0.0-b2 or optional Card Lamination Module compatibility.)
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders without Embedded Fonts and Bar Codes:
The latest version of Firmware supported by the Card Printer/Encoders is Firmware
Version 2.0.0-b2. (Technician Note: This version provides support for the optional Card
Lamination Module.)
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 26
Printer Components: Blank Cards
Caution: Never run cards with a contaminated, dull or uneven surface through the
Printer. Printing cards on this surface can lead to poor print quality and can greatly reduce
the life of the Printhead. Always store the card stock in its original packaging or in a clean,
dust-free container. Do not print onto cards that have been dropped or soiled. Printhead
damage caused by contaminated or poor quality cards will automatically void the Printhead's
factory warranty.
Type Description
Card Size The card Printer accepts standard CR-80 sized cards (3.375” L x 2.125”
W/85.6mm L x 54mm W) or CR-79 sized cards (3.303” L x 2.051” W/83.9mm
L x 52.1mm W) with a thickness of 10 mil to 50 mil. This does not apply for
the LC printers.
Card
Design The Printer will print onto any card with a clean, level and polished PVC
surface. (Note: Although the Printer is equipped with card cleaning Rollers,
it is very important to always print onto cards specifically designed for direct-
to-card Dye-Sublimation printing.)
Card
Surface Suitable cards must have a polished PVC surface free of fingerprints, dust or
any other types of embedded contaminants.
Cards must have a completely smooth, level surface in order for the
Printer to achieve consistent color coverage.
Some types of Proximity cards, for example, have an uneven surface
which will inhibit consistent color transfer.
Some Smart Card chips are raised slightly above the cards surface,
which also results in poor color transfer.
UltraCard
Stock Due to the importance of using high-quality blank cards, a factory-approved
card stock called UltraCard™ is available and recommended for best results.
UltraCard stock has a glossy PVC laminate on top and bottom and is
optically inspected to provide the cleanest, most scratch and debris-
reduced cards possible.
Two types of these cards are available: UltraCard and UltraCard III.
UltraCard stock has a PVC core and offers medium card durability.
UltraCard III stock has a 40% polyester core and offers high durability.
Both types of UltraCards produce printed images with a glossy, photo-quality
finish.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 27
Reviewing the upgraded 81754 PVC Cards
The upgraded 81754 PVC cards are designed for a sharper card image quality and for
reduced debris and defects on Fargo Card Printers. Carefully read these detailed notes and
instructions before applying this information to your Fargo printer or printers.
Technician Note 1: The new card lot number starts at Lot # 2010104 with date codes
that started on 04/01/2003. The photo (below) shows a lot number that starts after Lot #
2010104, indicating a new card lot number. The card lot number and date can be read
on the bar code label attached to the shrink-wrapped stack of 100 cards, as shown
below. All new Fargo printers with a serial number (S/N) starting with A320 will have
factory settings for these new 81754 PVC cards.
Technician Note 2: Do not use the new 81754 PVC card stock with Fargo laminating
printers/encoders. This same guideline is used for the existing 81754 PVC card stock.
Fargo recommends using the UltraCard III stock with the Fargo laminating
printers/encoders.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 28
Reviewing the upgraded 81754 PVC Cards (continued)
Follow these two (2) instructions below:
1. Instruction for new 81754 PVC card stock: Increase the Printer Driver’s Dye-Sub
Intensity to print with the new 81754 PVC card stock on Fargo Card Printers (S/N A319
and older). See the chart provided below. See the appropriate Fargo service documents
for specific Printer Driver instructions.
Card New Printer (S/N A320 and
newer) Old Printer (S/N A319 and
older)
New Card No Change Necessary Increase the Dye-Sub Intensity as
follows:
HDP®: N/A
Pro-LX/C25: 3 - 5 %
DTC500: 5 -10 %
C11/C16: 3 - 5 %
2. Instruction for existing 81754 PVC card stock: The Printer Driver’s Dye-Sub Intensity
setting may or may not need to be decreased to print existing card stock. See the chart
provided below. See the appropriate Fargo service documents for specific Printer Driver
instructions.
Technician Note 1: To control the brightness of the image, adjust the Dye-Sub
Intensity slide on the Image Color tab of the Printer Driver.
Technician Note 2: Moving the Dye-Sub Intensity slide to the left causes less heat
to be used in the printing process, thus generating a lighter print.
Card New Printer (S/N A320 and
newer) Old Printer (S/N A319 and older)
Old Card Decrease the Dye-Sub Intensity
as follows:
HDP®: N/A
Pro-LX/C25: 3 - 5 %
DTC500: 5 - 10 %
C11/C16: 3 - 5 %
No Change Necessary
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 29
Printer Components: Card Input and Output Hoppers
Type Description
Card Input
Hopper The Card Input Hopper is where cards are initially loaded for printing, as
shown below. The Printer's hopper provides a large door that opens up
wide to make card loading simple and closes securely to help protect the
card stock. (Note: The Printer will hold a maximum of 100 cards in each
Card Input Hopper, based on a standard 30 mil. card thickness.)
Card Output
Hopper All standard Card Printers provide a 100 card capacity Card Output
Hopper (based on a standard 30 mil card thickness). (Note: This hopper
stores the cards after they are printed.)
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 30
Printer Components: Lamination Roller
Danger: The Printer’s Lamination Roller can reach temperatures exceeded 350
degree F (175 C). Use extreme caution when operating the Laminator. Never touch the
Lamination Roller unless the Printer Power has been turned off for at least 20 to 30 minutes.
Type Description
Controls Both the Printer itself and the Printer’s software driver control the built-in
laminator.
Temperature
Adjustment To change the temperature of the laminator, adjust its temperature
through the Lamination tab within the Printer driver setup window.
Once adjusted, the new temperature settings will be sent down with the
next print job along with the rest of the Printer driver information.
New
Temperature
Setting
Before printing begins, the laminator will automatically adjust itself to the
new temperature setting. (Note: This new temperature setting will
remain programmed within the Printer until it is once again changed
within the Printer driver or until the Printer is turned OFF.)
Whenever the Printer is turned OFF, the laminator will automatically reset
itself and return to its default temperature the next time the Printer is
turned ON.
Disconnect the Printer's power cord.
(Technician Note: Both the Power Switch and the Printer’s power cord
serve to reset the laminator to its default temperature. The temperature
setting within the Printer driver, however, will stay the same until it is
changed.)
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 31
Reviewing the Card Lamination Module
Danger: The Printer’s Lamination Roller can reach temperatures exceeding 350° F
(175° C). Use extreme caution when operating the Laminator. Never touch the Lamination
Roller unless the Printer has been turned off for at least 20 to 30 minutes.
Select Printer models support the attachment of an optional Card Lamination Module. This
module can be ordered pre-installed on your Printer from the factory or can be ordered
separately as a field upgradeable module.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 32
Determining the Ready Status of the Card Lamination Module
Caution (Technician Note): Review these requirements:
If you are using a DTC525 Card Printer, you must have version 2.0.0-b2 or higher of the
Printer’s Main Firmware to use the Card Lamination Module.
If you do not have these versions, the Card Lamination Module will not function properly.
To check the version of your Printer’s Firmware, simply turn the Printer power OFF and
ON. (Note: The Firmware version will display momentarily on the Printer’s LCD display
during startup.)
If you are in need of a Firmware upgrade, please go to Fargo’s website (www.fargo.com)
for the latest Firmware file and updating instructions. (Note: This file must be updated
prior connecting the Card Lamination Module to the Printer.)
Technician Note: All DTC525 units manufactured after Serial Number A2350145 are
ready to have a Card Lamination Module attached to them.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 33
Reviewing the Lamination Top Cover and Station
Component Description Cross Reference
Lamination
Top Cover Opens to allow access to the Lamination
Station, overlaminate and card path. See the Loading the
Overlaminate in Section 3,
page 115.
Lamination
Station Transfers overlaminates onto cards via its
heated lamination Roller. The Lamination
Station must be closed in order for the
Printer to begin laminating.
See the Loading the
Overlaminate in Section 3,
page 115.
Lamination
Top Cover
Securing
Latches
Lamination Station
Lamination
LED Light
Cancel
Button
Resume
(pause) Button
Rejection
Card Hopper
Card Output
Hopper
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 34
Reviewing the Securing Latches and Lamination LED light
Component Description Cross Reference
Securing
Latches Locks the Lamination Station securely in
place when closed. See the Using the
Lamination tab (only with the
Card Lamination Module) in
Section 5, page 209.
Lamination
LED light The Lamination LED light works in
conjunction with the Printer's LCD display to
help communicate the Printer's current
status. The following explains how to
interpret the LED light.
Off: Indicates the Printer and lamination
module power is OFF.
Solid Green light: Indicates the Card
Lamination Module is ready for
operation.
Slow Flashing Green light: Indicates
the lamination module's (pause) button
was pushed and that the lamination
module is paused. This also occurs
when the Lamination Station is open.
Fast Flashing Green light: Indicates
the lamination module is in need of
attention due to an error or an error
condition. Refer to the Printer's LCD
display for information.
See the Troubleshooting the
LCD Messages in Section 2,
page 46.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 35
Reviewing the Cancel button
Component Description Cross Reference
Cancel
Button The Cancel button serves to cancel the
current lamination job and reset the Card
Lamination Module for the next lamination
job.
If a card is left within the lamination
module after a print job is canceled, it will
automatically be ejected into the
Rejection Card Hopper. (Note: With the
Lamination Module's Transfer Station
open, this button can also be used to
manually rotate the Feed Rollers
forward. This is helpful when cleaning
the Rollers or if clearing jammed media.)
If you are printing and laminating
simultaneously and you would like to
cancel both the print and lamination jobs,
press the Printer's CANCEL softkey
button. (Note: This will cancel all jobs in
the Printer. Any card currently laminating
will finish and eject. The lamination
module's Cancel button cancels only the
lamination job.)
See the Section 3: Card
Lamination Module on
page 114.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 36
Reviewing the Resume (pause) button
Component Description Cross Reference
Resume
(pause)
button
Press the Resume button to resume
operation after an error condition is
cleared.
If an error occurs, the lamination
module's LED will flash and the
Printer's LCD will report the specific
error.
If this happens, correct the error and
press the lamination module's
Resume button to continue printing.
Press this button to pause the
lamination module during normal
operation. (Note: The lamination
module will always finish its current task
before pausing.)
If this button is pressed while a card
is being laminated, the lamination
module will pause only after the
current card has finished laminating
and the lamination module has
reached a safe stopping point.)
If the Printer is paused, the LED
light will flash slowly and will return
to solid when operation is resumed.
(Note: with the Lamination Station
open, the Resume button can also
be used to manually rotate the Feed
Rollers backward. This is helpful
when cleaning the Rollers or when
clearing jammed media.)
See the Using the Lamination
tab (only with the Card
Lamination Module) in Section
5, page 209.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 37
Reviewing the Rejection Card Hopper and Card Output Hopper
Component Description Cross Reference
Rejection
Card Hopper The Rejection Card Hopper helps to
separate potentially bad cards from a stack
of good cards, which it eject into the Card
Output Hopper.
The Printer will automatically eject cards
into this hopper to indicate:
There is a printing error, laminating
error or encoding error.
There is a card is left in the Printer after
a print job is canceled or the Printer
restarted.
See the Using the
Lamination tab (only with
the Card Lamination
Module) in Section 5, page
209.
Card Output
Hopper Stores up to 100 printed cards (30 mil
cards).
a. When the hopper has reached its
maximum capacity of cards, note that
the operation pauses and an Output
Hopper Full message appears on the
Printer's LCD display.
b. Remove the stack of cards from the
hopper.
c. Press the lamination module's Resume
button to continue. (Note: If printing
onto oversized cards, the Card Output
Hopper Door should be placed in the
open position in order for these larger
cards to eject properly.)
See the Using the
Lamination tab (only with
the Card Lamination
Module) in Section 5, page
209.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 38
Reviewing the Module and Printer interaction
Term Description Cross Reference
Module
and
Printer
interaction
The Card Lamination Module works in
conjunction with the Printer to apply a
variety of different overlaminates to
printed cards, providing increased card
durability and security.
The Lamination Module features its own
LED indicator light and control buttons so
it can conveniently be operated separately
from the Printer. (Note: This means that
when printing a batch of cards, for
example, the Printer can be encoding and
printing one card while the lamination
module laminates another card for
maximum efficiency.)
In fact, you can even open the lamination
module to replace the overlaminate while
the Printer is printing or encoding and
vice versa.
See the Using the Lamination
tab (only with the Card
Lamination Module) in Section
5, page 209.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 39
Reviewing the Module and LCD display interaction
Term Description Cross Reference
Module
and LCD
display
interaction
For ease of operation, the Card
Lamination Module works in tandem with
the Printer's LCD display to communicate
status message such as when an error
occurs or when it is time to replace the
overlaminate material.
If a lamination error does occur, the
Lamination Module's LED will flash and
an attention level message will appear on
the Printer's LCD display. (Note: Since it
is an ATTENTION level message, it will
not interrupt printing.)
a. Correct the error.
b. Press OK to clear the LCD's
ATTENTION message.
c. Press the Lamination Module's
Resume button to resume operation
or its Cancel button to cancel the
current lamination job and accept the
next. (Note: If canceled, the canceled
card will eject into the Rejection Card
Hopper.)
See the Using the Lamination
tab (only with the Card
Lamination Module) in Section
5, page 209.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 40
Reviewing the Module’s Programmed Default Temperature
Term Description Reference
Programmed
Default
Temperature
Upon initial power up, the Lamination
Module is programmed to heat the
Lamination Roller up to its default
temperature.
Target Temperature: If a print job is
sent while the lamination module is
heating up, the Printer's LCD display
will read Laminator Warming. This will
alternate with LAM Temp: [current]
[target] which shows the current
temperature of the Lamination Roller
and the target temperature it is trying
to reach. (Note: This indicates that
the lamination Roller is heating to its
preset temperature.)
Initial Heating Process: The initial
heating process will generally take
about 3 to 4 minutes. (Note: The
LCD display will read Laminator
Warming or Laminator Cooling
whenever the Lamination Roller is
heating up or cooling down to the
prescribed temperature. When the
Lamination Module has reached its
target temperature, lamination will
begin.)
See the Using the Lamination
tab (only with the Card
Lamination Module) in Section
5, page 209.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 41
Reviewing the Laminator Temperature Adjustment
Term Description
Laminator
Temperature
Adjustment
To change the temperature of the
Laminator, adjust its temperature through
the Lamination tab within the Printer
Driver setup window.
New Temperature Settings: Once
adjusted, the new temperature
settings will be sent down with the
next print job along with the rest of the
Printer driver information. Before
printing begins, the laminator will
automatically adjust itself to the new
temperature setting. (Note: This new
temperature setting will remain
programmed within the Printer until it
is once again changed within the
Printer driver or until the Printer is
turned OFF.)
Automatic Reset: Whenever the
Printer is turned OFF, the laminator
will automatically reset itself and
return to its default temperature the
next time the Printer is turned ON.
(Note: Pressing the lamination
module's or Printer's Cancel button or
switching the Printer power OFF and
ON both serve to reset the Laminator
to its default temperature.)
Consistent Temperature: The
temperature setting within the Printer
driver stays the same until it is
changed.
See the Using the Lamination
tab (only with the Card
Lamination Module) in Section
5, page 209.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 42
Reviewing the Overlaminates
IMPORTANT! Fargo Card Printers require highly specialized overlaminates to function
properly. To maximize Printer life, reliability, printed card quality and durability, you must use
only Fargo Certified Supplies. For this reason, the Fargo warranty is void, where not
prohibited by law, if you use non-Fargo Certified Supplies. To order additional materials,
please contact the authorized reseller.
Reviewing the Thermal Transfer Film and PolyGuard Overlaminates
Term Description Cross Reference
Thermal
Transfer Film
and
PolyGuard
Overlaminates
The Card Lamination Module will accept
either a Thermal Transfer Film overlaminate
or a polyester patch overlaminate called
PolyGuard™.
Thermal Transfer Film: The Thermal
Transfer Film overlaminate is a relatively
thin material which covers a card edge-
to-edge and provides a medium level of
card durability and security.)
PolyGuard overlaminate: PolyGuard
is a much thicker material which does
not cover edge-to-edge, but provides an
extremely high level of card durability
and security. (Note: PolyGuard is
available in either a 1.0 or .6 mil
thickness and should always be used for
those applications requiring the highest
degree of card durability and security.)
See the Loading the
Overlaminate procedure in
Section 3, page 115.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 43
Reviewing the CR-90 or CR-100 Patch Size
Term Description Cross Reference
CR-90 or
CR-100 PolyGuard overlaminate is available in a
standard CR-80 patch size as well as a CR-
90 and CR-100 patch size for laminating
oversized CR-90 or CR-100 cards. (Note:
Thermal Transfer Film overlaminate will
accommodate CR-80 and CR-90 card sizes,
but is not recommended for CR-100 cards.)
See the Loading the
Overlaminate procedure in
Section 3, page 115.
Reviewing the Overlaminate Design
Term Description Cross Reference
Design Both PolyGuard and the Thermal Transfer
Film overlaminates are available in either a
clear or generic secure holographic-type
design. (Note: Custom holographic-type
overlaminates are also available with specific
designs, patterns, logos and security
features.)
Please contact the authorized reseller for
more information about custom
Overlaminates.
See the Loading the
Overlaminate procedure in
Section 3, page 115.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 44
Reviewing the Visual Security Solutions
VeriMarkTM Cards - 2-D holographic foil application
VeriMarkTM Cards are a low cost, customized 2-D holographic foil application, that is made
in two steps.
The first step is to emboss a base foil 1.9 cm (L) x 1.3 cm (H) onto the surface of a blank
white card.
The second step is debossing a custom made dye into the surface of the base foil -
leaving a customized image, logo or text provided by the customer.
Two separate color foils are used to contrast the impression.
End Users will be able to choose between 8 different card placements (4 - landscape) and
(4-portrait) where the VeriMarkTM can be located. When its time to print through the driver,
the End User will select the location on their organizations card design around which no
printing and overlay will be placed.
Custom HoloMarkTM Cards
A Custom HoloMark TM Card is a three-dimensional holographic image transferred to metal
foil and embossed to blank cards. The image is customer specific and the program mirrors
our holographic laminates program with a couple exceptions.
Visual Security - Card Stock Part Numbers
All Visual Security Cards will be offered on the following Fargo Card Stocks only:
P/N# 81754 Ultra Card
P/N# 81762 Ultra Card III with hi-coercivity magnetic stripe
P/N# 81763 Ultra Card III
Visual Security - Fargo Certified Overlaminates (Special Order in 50
quantity minimum)
Part No. 82255: PolyGuard 1.0 mil for HoloMarkTM and VeriMarkTM Cards, Clear
Part No. 82256: PolyGuard 1.0 mil for HoloMarkTM and VeriMarkTM Cards, High
Resolution Globe design hologram with "Secure" micro-text
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 45
Visual Security Card Stock - Tolerances
Tolerance of base foil placement will equal +/- .010" from the nearest edges of the card
Tolerance of layered foil will equal +/- .010"
VeriMarkTM - Application Specifications
VeriMarkTM foils will cover a dimensional area of 1.9 cm length x 1.3 cm height. The
exclusive areas are as follows:
VeriMarkTM Card customers will be able to choose 1 of 8 pre-defined placements
(corners) via printer driver (4 positions) Landscape and (4 Positions) Portrait mode.
VeriMarkTM foil placement will not interfere with card punch slots .
Foil color base is silver; debossed impression is gold foil.
VeriMarkTM foil placement will be located 0.4 cm from the edges of the card except for
the top two locations on portrait orientation cards (positions E & F). The foil will be
located 0.9 cm from the top of the card and 0.4 cm from the sides of the card.
HoloMarkTM and Custom HoloMarkTM - Application Specifications
HoloMarkTM and Custom HoloMarkTM foils will cover a dimensional area of 1.5 cm x 1.5
cm. The exclusive areas are as follows:
HoloMarkTM and Custom HoloMarkTM card end-users will be able to choose 1 of 8 pre-
defined placements (corners) via printer driver (4 positions) Landscape and (4 positions)
Portrait mode.
HoloMarkTM foil placement will not interfere with card punch slots.
Foil Color options will be silver or gold.
Outside edge placement of Foil impression options on card will be 0.4 cm from edge of
card.
HoloMarkTM foil placement options will be at all four corners of card located 0.4 cm from
edge of card.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 46
Section 2: General Troubleshooting
IMPORTANT! Fargo Card Printers require highly specialized print Ribbons to function
properly. To maximize Printer life, reliability, printed card quality and durability, you must use
only Fargo Certified Supplies. For this reason, your Fargo warranty is void, where not
prohibited by law, if you use non-Fargo Certified Supplies. To order additional materials,
please contact your authorized reseller.
Reviewing the LCD display and LED light
The LCD display provides the current status of the Printer. Refer to the following tables for a
complete list and cause of all possible LCD messages. The tables (in this section) display the
LCD messages. If the LCD message is communicating an error or requires an action, these
tables will also offer a solution to what should be done.
The purpose of this section is to provide the User with specific procedures relating to the
LCD/SmartGuard Messages, Communication Errors, Card Feeding Errors, Encoding Errors,
Printing Process Errors and Diagnosing the Image Problems for the DTC500 series card
Printer.
Troubleshooting the LCD Messages
Message Cause Solution
Aligning Ribbon If this appears as a prompt, it
indicates the print Ribbon is
self-aligning to the proper
position for printing.
If this appears as an
ERROR, it indicates the print
Ribbon is not installed
properly or is damaged.
See Resolving the Ribbon Alignment
Error Message in Section 2, page 82.
Card Hopper
Empty Indicates the Printer has run
out of blank cards.
See the Resolving the Card Hopper
Empty Error Message procedure in
Section 2, page 73.
Card Hopper Jam Indicates that the Card
Hopper is unable to move
from one hopper to the next.
Clear any obstructions and close the
hopper door.
See Resolving the Card Hopper Jam
Error Message in Section 2, page 72.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 47
Troubleshooting the LCD Messages (continued)
Message Cause Solution
Card Jam Indicates that a card is
jammed in the Print St
ation or
card flipping area of the
Printer.
See Card Feeding Errors in Section 2,
page 67.
Card Jam: Flipper
Indicates that a card is
jammed in the card flipping
area of the Printer.
See Resolving cards jamming on the
Flipper table in Section 2, page 70.
Card Jam: Print Indicates that a card is
jammed in the Print Station
of the Printer.
See Card Feeding Errors in Section 2,
page 67.
Card Jam: Mag Indicates that a card is
jammed in the magnetic
encoding area of the Printer.
See Removing the Card jam in the
Printer’s Magnetic Encoding Area in
Section 2, page 77.
Card Jam: Smart Indicates that a card is
jammed in the Smart Card
encoding area of the Printer.
See Removing the Card jam in the
Printer’s Smart Card Encoding Area in
Section 2, page 78.
Data Input Indicates that the print data
sent to the Printer is corrupt
or has been interrupted.
See Resolving the Communication
Errors in Section 2, page 62.
Data Timeout Indicates that the print data
sent to the Printer is corrupt
or has been interrupted.
See Resolving the Communication
Errors in Section 2, page 62.
DRAM Memory
Error Indicates that the Printer's
Memory Module is bad or is
not installed properly.
See Resolving the DRAM Memory
Error in Section 7, page 231.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 48
Troubleshooting the LCD Messages (continued)
Message Cause Solution
EE Checksum
Error Indicates that the permanent
circuit board memory is bad. See Resolving the EE Checksum
Error in Section 8, page 230.
EE Memory Error Indicates that the permanent
circuit board memory is bad. See Resolving the EE Memory Error
in Section 8, page 230.
Ejecting Used
Card Indicates that the system
Firmware has detected a
card already in the Printer.
This card has been ejected; however,
it may contain encoded data and
should be disposed of in a proper
manner.
Failed To
Initialize Indicates that an unexpected
hardware error has occurred.
See Board Errors in Section 8, page
230.
Flipper Alignment Indicates that the Printer is
unable to align the Flipper
table.
See Resolving the Flipper Alignment
Error Message in Section 2, page 89.
FPGA Indicates that an unexpected
hardware error has occurred.
See Resolving the FPGA Error in
Section 8, page 231.
FPGA Load Fail Indicates that an unexpected
hardware error has occurred.
See Resolving the FPGA Error in
Section 8, page 231.
FPGA Timeout Indicates that an unexpected
hardware error has occurred.
See Resolving the FPGA Error in
Section 8, page 231.
Head Lift Indicates that the Printer was
unable to raise or lower the
Printhead.
See Resolving the Headlift Error
Message in Section 2, page 86.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 49
Troubleshooting the LCD Messages (continued)
Message Cause Solution
Head Resistance
Error The LCD requires that a
value be input for the Print
Head Resistance.
Enter a value for head resistance in
the LCD's Printer Setup menu.
See Setting the Printhead Resistance
in Section 8, page 246.
Head Voltage
Error A hardware fault has
prevented a correct setting
of the Printhead voltage.
A default value will be used.
Hopper 1 Empty Card Hopper 1 has run out
of cards. (Note: The Printer
will continue printing from
Hopper 2 if First Available is
set as the Card Hopper
Selection in the Driver.)
See the Resolving the Card Hopper
Empty Error Message procedure in
Section 2, page 73.
Hopper 2 Empty Card Hopper 2 has run out
of cards. (Note: The Printer
will continue printing from
Hopper 1 if First Available is
set as the Card Hopper
Selection in the Driver.)
See the Resolving the Card Hopper
Empty Error Message procedure in
Section 2, page 73.
Invalid Flip
Command Indicates that the Printer
received a command to print
both sides of the card, but
this model does not support
dual-sided printing.
Press CANCEL to reset the Printer or
RESUME to print onto two separate
cards.
Invalid Print
Ribbon Indicates an unauthorized
Ribbon. Install a valid, Fargo-authorized
Ribbon and press RESUME to
continue.
See Resolving the Unknown Ribbon
Type Error Message in Section 2,
page 85.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 50
Troubleshooting the LCD Messages (continued)
Message Cause Solution
Mag Encode
Failed Indicates that the card's
Magnetic Stripe was not
encoded properly.
See Resolving the Failed Magnetic
Encode Error Message in Section 2,
page 76.
Multiple Cards
Fed Indicates that two or more
cards were fed from the
Card Hopper.
See Resolving the Card Feeding
Errors in Section 2, page 67.
No ENC
Response Indicates that there is no
response from the Encoder
control module.
See Resolving the No ENC Response
Error Message in Section 2, page 74.
No MAG Encoder Indicates that the Printer has
received encoding data, but
the Printer is not configured
with this Encoder type.
See Resolving the No Magnetic
Encoder Error Message in Section 2,
page 74.
No Ribbon
Installed Indicates that the Printer is
trying to print with no print
Ribbon installed.
Install the proper print Ribbon and
press RESUME to continue or
CANCEL to reset the Printer.
No Smart
Encoder Indicates that the Printer has
received encoding data, but
the Printer is not configured
with this Encoder type.
See Resolving the No Smart Encoder
Error Message in Section 2, page 76.
Pause... Indicates the Printer is
paused. Press the Printer's RESUME button to
continue or CANCEL to clear all
pending print jobs and reset the
Printer.
Please Clean
Printer This message appears every
3,000 prints to remind you to
perform the recommended
Printer maintenance.
See the Cleaning the Printer
procedure in Section 4, page 209.
Please Remove
Card Indicates that the card is
jammed in the Print Station
or card flipping area of the
Printer.
See Card Feeding Errors in Section 2,
page 67.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 51
Troubleshooting the LCD Messages (continued)
Message Cause Solution
Print Data Indicates that the print data
sent to the Printer is corrupt
or has been interrupted.
See Communications Errors in
Section 2, page 53.
Print Ribbon Low Indicates that the print
Ribbon will soon run out. If printing a large number of cards,
replace the Ribbon now or monitor the
Printer until the Ribbon is gone and
install a new Ribbon.
Print Ribbon Out Indicates that the print
Ribbon has run out. Install a new Ribbon and press
RESUME to continue.
Print Station
Open Indicates that the Print
Station is open during
printing.
Close the Station and press the
Printer's RESUME button to continue
or CANCEL to reset the Printer.
Print Timeout Indicates that the Printer was
unable to complete the print
process.
See Communications Errors in
Section 2, page 53.
Printhead Temp Indicates that the Printhead
Temperature Regulator is
not functioning properly.
See Resolving the Printhead Temp
Error Message in Section 2, page 88.
Program
Exception Indicates that the system
Firmware has detected an
error while attempting to
process the current print job.
See the Updating the Printer’s
Firmware procedure in Section 8,
page 259.
RAM Memory
Error Indicates that the Printer's
Memory Module is bad or
not installed properly.
See Resolving the DRAM Memory
Error in Section 7, page 231.
Ribbon
Jam/Broken The print Ribbon is either
jammed or broken. See Resolving the Ribbon Jam/Broke
Error Message in Section 2, page 83.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 52
Troubleshooting the LCD Messages (continued)
Message Cause Solution
Smart Encode
Failed The card's smart chip was
not encoded properly. See Resolving the Failed Smart
Encode Error Message in Section 2,
page 76.
Starting Self-test The self-test print is
preparing to print. See the Printing the Self-test
procedure in Section 7, page 238.
Testing Memory The Printer's memory is
being tested. Upon completion, the Printer will
continue its normal boot up sequence.
Top Cover Open A print job was started with
the Top Cover open. Close the Printer and press RESUME
to continue or CANCEL to reset the
Printer.
Unable To Feed
Card The Printer is unable to feed
a card from the Card
Hopper.
See Resolving the Card Feeding
Errors in Section 2, page 67.
Unknown Ribbon
Type The Printer does not
recognize the Ribbon
installed.
See Resolving the Unknown Ribbon
Type Error Message in Section 2,
page 85.
Update Failed The Firmware update was
interrupted or not completed
successfully.
See Resolving an Upgrade Failed
error in Section 2, page 90.
Update Firmware
Now An error has occurred in
trying to load the Firmware. The system Firmware MUST be
updated.
See Updating the Printer's Firmware
in Section 9, page 259.
Wrong Print
Ribbon The print Ribbon installed in
the Printer does not match
the Ribbon type selected in
the Printer driver.
See Resolving the Wrong Print
Ribbon Error Message in Section 2,
page 84.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 53
Verifying the Encoding Settings for DTC500 Series Card Printer and
Encoders
The purpose of this Technical Update is to clarify Encoding Settings in the DTC500 Series
Card Printer/Encoders. To ensure the proper function of your DTC500 Series Printer, all of
the Printer’s Encoding Options must be set correctly in the Printer’s LCD display. Please
refer to the tables (on the next page) to review the proper settings for (a) the different
DTC500 Series Printer models and (b) the different symptoms related to incorrect settings.
Follow these instructions to access your DTC500 Series Printer displays:
Use the Printers LCD display touch pad to press the Menu button.
Use the down arrow button to scroll down and select Setup Printer.
Use the down arrow button to scroll down and select the Encoder Settings.
The three (3) Encoding Options available are Mag, Smart and Prox. These options must be
set up according to the Printer model to avoid printing issues.
If you are unsure what your Printer should be set to at this time, please see the tables on
the following pages.
You can compare your Printer’s part number (located on the silver label on the bottom of
your Printer) to the part number (shown in the tables on the following pages) in order to
find the Printers correct settings.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 54
Verifying Encoder Settings for DTC 510/DTC 515 (Symptom A)
Symptoms of incorrect settings (Symptom A): Printer will try to rotate the Flipper Table
during a print job. The Flipper (however) is not powered and the printer will stall out with a
Flipper Jam or Data Time Out error.Table 1 (DTC 510 and DTC 515), Technical Update No.
66 (dated 09/24/2003)
Printer Model Part No. Proper Encoder Display
Settings
Mag None
Smart None
DTC 510 No Encoding
DTC 515 No Encoding
85301
85351 Prox None
Verifying Encoder Settings for DTC 510/DTC 515 (Symptom B)
Symptom of incorrect settings (Symptom B): Flipper Table will freely rotate and cause
card jams at the Flipper Table.
Printer Model Part No. Proper Encoder Display
Settings
Mag Installed
Smart None
DTC 510 Magnetic encoding
DTC 515 Magnetic encoding
85302
85352 Prox None
Mag None
Smart Installed
DTC 510 Docking Station
DTC 515 Docking Station
85303
85353 Prox None
Mag Installed
Smart Installed
DTC 510 Docking Station + Magnetic
Encoding
DTC 515 Docking Station + Magnetic
Encoding
85304
85354 Prox None
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 55
Verifying Encoder Settings for DTC 510/DTC 515 (Symptom B) (continued)
Printer Model Part No. Proper Encoder Display
Settings
Mag Installed
Smart None
DTC 510 JIS II Magnetic Encoder
DTC 515 JIS II Magnetic Encoder
85305
85355 Prox None
Mag Installed
Smart Installed
DTC 510 Docking Station + Magnetic
Encoder
DTC 515 Docking Station + Magnetic
Encoder
85306
85356 Prox None
Mag None
Smart Installed
DTC 510 Docking Station, Contact
Smart Card Encoder
DTC 515 Docking Station, Contact
Smart Card Encoder
91101
91201 Prox None
Mag None
Smart Installed
DTC 510 Docking Station, MIFARE
Contactless Smart Card Encoder
DTC 515 Docking Station, MIFARE
Contactless Smart Card Encoder
91102
91202 Prox None
Mag None
Smart Installed
DTC 510 Docking Station, HID Prox
Reader
DTC 515 Docking Station, HID Prox
Reader
91104
91204 Prox Installed
Mag None
Smart Installed
DTC 510 Docking Station, Contact
Smart Card encoder MIFARE Encoder
DTC 510 Docking Station, Contact
Smart Card encoder MIFARE Encoder
91105
91205 Prox None
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 56
Verifying Encoder Settings for DTC 510/DTC 515 (Symptom B) (continued)
Printer Model Part No. Proper Encoder Display
Settings
Mag None
Smart Installed
DTC 510 Docking Station, MIFARE
Encoder, HID Prox Encoder
DTC 515 Docking Station, MIFARE
Encoder, HID Prox Encoder
91106
91206 Prox Installed
Mag None
Smart Installed
DTC 510 Docking Station, Contact
Smart Card Encoder, MIFARE Encoder,
HID Prox Reader
DTC 515 Docking Station, Contact
Smart Card Encoder, MIFARE Encoder,
HID Prox Reader
91107
91207 Prox Installed
Mag Installed
Smart Installed
DTC 510 Docking Station, Magnetic
Encoder, Contact Smart Card encoder
DTC 515 Docking Station, Magnetic
Encoder, Contact Smart Card encoder
91108
91208 Prox None
Mag Installed
Smart Installed
DTC 510 Docking Station, Magnetic
Encoder, MIFARE Encoder
DTC 515 Docking Station, Magnetic
Encoder, MIFARE Encoder
91109
91209 Prox None
Mag Installed
Smart Installed
DTC 510 Docking Station, Magnetic
Encoder, HID Prox Reader
DTC 515 Docking Station, Magnetic
Encoder, HID Prox Reader
91110
91210 Prox Installed
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 57
Verifying Encoder Settings for DTC 510/DTC 515 (Symptom B) (continued)
Printer Model Part No. Proper Encoder Display
Settings
Mag Installed
Smart Installed
DTC 510 Docking Station, Magnetic
Encoder, Contact Smart Card Encoder,
MIFARE Encoder
DTC 515 Docking Station, Magnetic
Encoder, Contact Smart Card encoder
91111
91211 Prox None
Mag Installed
Smart Installed
DTC 510 Docking Station, Magnetic
Encoder, Contact Smart Card Encoder,
HID Prox Reader
DTC 515 Docking Station, Magnetic
Encoder, Contact Smart Card Encoder,
HID Prox Reader
91112
91212 Prox Installed
Mag Installed
Smart Installed
DTC 510 Docking Station, Magnetic
Encoder, MIFARE Encoder, HID Prox
Reader
DTC 515 Docking Station, Magnetic
Encoder, MIFARE Encoder, HID Prox
Reader
91113
91213 Prox Installed
Mag Installed
Smart Installed
DTC 515 Docking Station, Magnetic
Encoder, Contact Smart Card Encoder,
MIFARE Encoder, HID Prox Reader
DTC 515 Docking Station, Magnetic
Encoder, Contact Smart Card Encoder,
MIFARE Encoder, HID Prox Reader
91114
91214 Prox Installed
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 58
Verifying the Encoding Settings for the DTC 520/DTC 525
Symptoms of incorrect settings: Printers card feed motor for the flipper table will rotate
backwards and then produce a Card Jam error.
Printer Model Part No. Proper Encoder Display
Settings
Mag None
Smart None
DTC 520 No Encoding
DTC 525 No Encoding
85401
85451 Prox None
Mag Installed
Smart None
DTC 520 Magnetic encoding
DTC 525 Magnetic encoding
85402
85452 Prox None
Mag None
Smart Installed
DTC 520 Docking Station
DTC 525 Docking Station
85403
85453 Prox None
Mag Installed
Smart Installed
DTC 520 Docking Station + Magnetic
Encoding
DTC 525 Docking Station + Magnetic
Encoding
85404
85454 Prox None
Mag Installed
Smart None
DTC 520 JIS II Magnetic Encoder
DTC 525 JIS II Magnetic Encoder
85405
85455 Prox None
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 59
Verifying the Encoding Settings for the DTC 520/DTC 525 (continued)
Printer Model Part No. Proper Encoder Display
Settings
Mag Installed
Smart Installed
DTC 520 Docking Station + Magnetic
Encoder
DTC 525 Docking Station + Magnetic
Encoder
85406
85456 Prox None
Mag None
Smart Installed
DTC 520 Docking Station, Contact
Smart Card Encoder
DTC 525 Docking Station, Contact
Smart Card Encoder
91301
91401 Prox None
Mag None
Smart Installed
DTC 520 Docking Station, MIFARE
Contactless Smart Card Encoder
DTC 525 Docking Station, MIFARE
Contactless Smart Card Encoder
91302
91402
Prox None
Mag None
Smart Installed
DTC 520 Docking Station, HID Prox
Reader
DTC 525 Docking Station, HID Prox
Reader
91304
91404 Prox Installed
Mag None
Smart Installed
DTC 520 Docking Station, Contact
Smart Card encoder MIFARE Encoder
DTC 525 Docking Station, Contact
Smart Card encoder MIFARE Encoder
91305
91405 Prox None
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 60
Verifying the Encoding Settings for the DTC 520/DTC 525 (continued)
Printer Model Part No. Proper Encoder Display
Settings
Mag None
Smart Installed
DTC 520 Docking Station, MIFARE
Encoder, HID Prox Encoder
DTC 555 Docking Station, MIFARE
Encoder, HID Prox Encoder
91306
91406 Prox Installed
Mag None
Smart Installed
DTC 520 Docking Station, Contact
Smart Card Encoder, MIFARE Encoder,
HID Prox Reader
DTC 525 Docking Station, Contact
Smart Card Encoder, MIFARE Encoder,
HID Prox Reader
91307
91407 Prox Installed
Mag Installed
Smart Installed
DTC 520 Docking Station, Magnetic
Encoder, Contact Smart Card encoder
DTC 525 Docking Station, Magnetic
Encoder, Contact Smart Card encoder
91308
91408 Prox None
Mag Installed
Smart Installed
DTC 520 Docking Station, Magnetic
Encoder, MIFARE Encoder
DTC 525 Docking Station, Magnetic
Encoder, MIFARE Encoder
91309
91409 Prox None
Mag Installed
Smart Installed
DTC 520 Docking Station, Magnetic
Encoder, HID Prox Reader
DTC 525 Docking Station, Magnetic
Encoder, HID Prox Reader
91310
91410 Prox Installed
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 61
Verifying the Encoding Settings for the DTC 520/DTC 525 (continued)
Printer Model Part No. Proper Encoder Display
Settings
Mag Installed
Smart Installed
DTC 520 Docking Station, Magnetic
Encoder, Contact Smart Card Encoder,
MIFARE Encoder
DTC 525 Docking Station, Magnetic
Encoder, Contact Smart Card encoder
91311
91411 Prox None
Mag Installed
Smart Installed
DTC 520 Docking Station, Magnetic
Encoder, Contact Smart Card Encoder,
HID Prox Reader
DTC 525 Docking Station, Magnetic
Encoder, Contact Smart Card Encoder,
HID Prox Reader
91312
91412 Prox Installed
Mag Installed
Smart Installed
DTC 520 Docking Station, Magnetic
Encoder, MIFARE Encoder, HID Prox
Reader
DTC 525 Docking Station, Magnetic
Encoder, MIFARE Encoder, HID Prox
Reader
91313
91413
Prox Installed
Mag Installed
Smart Installed
DTC 525 Docking Station, Magnetic
Encoder, Contact Smart Card Encoder,
MIFARE Encoder, HID Prox Reader
DTC 525 Docking Station, Magnetic
Encoder, Contact Smart Card Encoder,
MIFARE Encoder, HID Prox Reader
91314
91414
Prox Installed
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 62
Communications Errors
Resolving the Communication Errors
Symptom(s): Incorrect output, communications error on PC or Printer, stalling, no response
from Printer, no job printed, “Paper out” error.
Step Procedure
1 Confirm that the system meets the minimum requirements, as shown here:
IBM-PC or compatible
Windows 95/98/ME/NT/2000/XP Pentium™ class 133 MHz computer with
32 MB of RAM or higher
200 MB free hard disk space or higher
ECP Parallel Port with DMA access
2 Confirm the correct installation of the Printer driver.
a. Close the software program and check the Printer driver.
b. Reboot the computer.
c. Be sure the correct setup options within the Printer driver are selected.
d. Confirm that the driver is current by checking at: www.fargo.com
3 Verify the use of an adequate data cable.
a. Use a double-shielded parallel cable (no longer than six feet in length).
(Note: Data transmission failure can be attributed to a long or faulty
parallel cable.)
b. Use an I-EEE 1284 compliant cable to reduce the effect of radio emissions
from computers, monitors and other equipment that can broadcast Radio
frequency interference (RFI).
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 63
Resolving the Communication Errors (continued)
Step Procedure
4 Determine if there is interference from an external device.
a. Do not use an A/B Switch Box or other peripheral in line with the parallel
cable.
b. If using a Switch Box or other peripheral, remove it while testing
communication between the computer and the Printer.
c. If needed, replace the Switch Box or other peripheral (once it is determined
that the cause of the interference is not the Switch Box or the peripheral).
d. Alternative: Add a second Parallel Port into the computer (if a second
Printer is required).
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 64
Resolving the Communication Errors (continued)
Step Procedure
5 Determine the nature of the problem with printing from the application.
a. Print a self-test from the Printer to ensure that the Printer (itself) is
functioning properly. See the Printing the Self-test in Section 8, page 238.
b. Print the Windows test page that is located in the General tab of the driver.
c. Use WordPad (a Windows 95/ 98/ ME/ NT/ 2000/XP word processing
program in the Accessories Program Group) via Start > Programs >
Accessories > WordPad. Follow this procedure:
Open the program and type: “This is a Test.”
Select File > Page Setup and click on the Printer button.
Ensure that the DTC500 Series Card Printer is selected and click OK.
Change all the margin settings to zero (0) and click OK.
Select File > Print on the Menu Bar.
Go to File on Menu Bar and select Print.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 65
Resolving the Communication Errors (continued)
Step Procedure
6 Determine if the Parallel Port mode is set correctly.
a. Ensure that the Parallel Port is set to the Enhanced Communication Port
(ECP) mode. (Note: The port mode can be determined by checking the
Device Manager tab in the System Control Panel.)
b. If the port mode is not set to ECP, it will need to be changed in the
computers BIOS. (Note: Refer to the appropriate computer manual for
instructions on how to change the Parallel Port mode.)
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 66
Resolving the Communication Errors (continued)
Step Procedure
7 Determine whether there is an adequate or inadequate hard drive space.
Caution: A large volume of temporary files on the computer can
cause communications errors.
Access the temporary files by following this process:
Search for all folders called TEMP. Once found, clear out the contents of
the folders.
Run the System Tool - Disk Defragmenter (found in the Accessories folder
of the Start Menu) if using Windows 95/98/ME/2000/XP,.
Use a disk cleanup utility (such as Disk Cleanup found in the System
Tools folder of the Start menu) or use a third party application.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 67
Card Feeding Errors
Resolving the Card Feeding Errors
Symptom: Two or more cards feed at the same time or the cards will not feed at all.
Step Procedure
1 Clean the Input Roller.
a. Open the Printer's top covers and remove all cards and print Ribbons from
the Printer.
b. Leave the Printer power ON and the top covers open throughout this
procedure. (Note: The card-cleaning cartridge can also remain within the
Printer during this cleaning process.)
c. Use a cleaning card from the Printer Cleaning Kit and remove its adhesive
backing paper.
d. Insert the cleaning card into the Exception Card Slot until the card stops.
Verify that the longest non-adhesive end of the cleaning card enters the
Printer first and that the sticky side is facing DOWNWARD
e. Press the FORWARD button several times to feed the Cleaning Card all
the way through the Printer.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 68
Resolving the Card Feeding Errors (continued)
Step Procedure
2 Ensure the Card Thickness Lever is set correctly, as shown below.
a. Press the Card Thickness Lever Lock and then push the Card Thickness
Lever up or down to the appropriate setting.
b. with any of the Card Thickness settings, move the slide slightly toward a
higher setting until the cards begin feeding (if the Printer seems unable to
feed cards at the selected setting).
c. Move the slide slightly toward a lower setting (if the Printer seems to
double-feed cards). (Note: The card thickness slide is adjustable to
accommodate card thickness variations that often occur even within
standard card sizes.)
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 69
Resolving the Card Feeding Errors (continued)
Step Procedure
3 a. Check for static build up between cards. (Note: Occasionally, a static
charge will build up between the surfaces of two or more cards causing
them to stick together.)
b. Reduce or eliminate this static charge by separating the cards manually
before placing them in the input hopper.
4 Ensure that the cards are loaded properly in the Input Hopper.
a. Load the cards into the Printer by inserting them straight into the hopper
and setting them on the feed Roller.
5 Verify that the Hopper Lift (A000124) is operational.
a. Reset Power to the Printer.
b. Open the Card Hopper Door and watch to verify that the Hopper Cycles
on startup.
c. If the Hopper does not cycle on startup, remove the top cover and verify
that the Hopper Lift Motor is plugged in properly.
d. If the Hopper Lift Motor is plugged in, disconnect it and attach a 9-volt
battery to the leads.
e. If the Motor turns, replace the Main Board (as needed). See the
Replacing the Main Board procedure in Section 5, page Error!
Bookmark not defined..
Insert cards neatly stacked.
Cards
Card Hopper
(side view)
Card Feed Roller
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 70
Resolving the Card Jam on the Flipper Table
Symptom: Cards are jamming on or at the Flipper Table or a Card Jam: Flip error is
displayed on the LCD.
Step Procedure
1 Verify that the Card Feed Roller on the Flipper table is not running
backwards. (Note: Having an Encoder installed in the Printer will determine
the direction that the Card Feed Roller on the Flipper Table will rotate.)
a. Open the Top Cover and remove any cards that are jammed inside the
Printer, as shown below.
b. Reset power on the Printer to clear any error messages that are on the
LCD.
c. Press the MENU button on the LCD.
d. Press the Down Arrow button and select PRINTER SETUP.
e. Scroll through the menu and select ENCODER SETUP.
f. Ensure that the appropriate Encoders settings are set to Installed or
None, based on the options that are installed in the Printer.
g. Press the Save button to save any changes that have been changed.
Continued on the next page.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 71
Resolving cards jamming on the Flipper Table (Continued)
Step Procedure
2 Ensure that the Flipper Table is level. (Note: This procedure does not apply
to Printers with a Stationary Flipper Table, such as a DTC510/515 without
any Encoders installed.)
a. Open the Top Cover and remove any cards that are jammed inside the
Printer.
b. Reset power on the Printer to clear any error messages that are on the
LCD.
c. Press the MENU button on the LCD.
d. Press the Down Arrow button and select PRINTER SETUP.
e. Scroll through the menu and select FLIPPER OFFSET.
f. Select Level.
If the cards are feeding over the Feed Rollers on the card path,
adjust the value by +2.
OR
If the cards are feeding under the Card Feed Path, adjust the value
by –2.
3 Ensure that the Flipper Table Tension Spring is providing appropriate
tension.
a. Open the Top Cover on the Printer.
b. Remove the Ribbon.
c. Rotate the Flipper Table to an angle perpendicular to the Card Feed
Path.
d. Using the Forward button, insert a card onto the Flipper Table.
e. Once fed onto the Flipper Table (D850855), manually pull the card from
the Flipper table. (Note: There should be sufficient resistance to prevent
the card from slipping from the Flipper table.)
f. If there is not sufficient resistance, replace the U-shaped spring on the
back of the Flipper Table.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 72
Resolving the Card Hopper Jam Error Message
Step Procedure
1 Clear any obstructions.
a. Open the Input Hopper Door, as shown below.
b. Remove any cards from the Input Hopper.
c. Ensure that there are no cards that are partially fed out of the Card
Hopper.
2 Verify the mechanical operation.
a. Remove the Top Cover.
b. Ensure that the guide belt for the Hopper Travel Assembly (D850253) is
intact and moves smoothly.
c. Verify that the Hopper Travel Motor is properly meshed with the gear
assembly.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 73
Resolving the Card Hopper Empty Error Message
Symptom: The Hopper Empty error message is displayed on the LCD.
Step Procedure
1 Refill the hopper when convenient.
2 Be sure to load cards with the mag stripe toward the rear of the Printer.
3 Turn the Card Sensor off if it is determined that the Hopper’s Card Sensor
cannot see these types of cards. (Note: The activated Sensor indicates to
the Printer that the Card Input Hopper is empty, and the cards will not feed.)
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 74
Encoding Errors
Resolving the No Magnetic Encoder Error Message
Symptom: The Printer is receiving encoding data, but the Printer is not configured with this
Encoder type.
Step Procedure
1 Ensure the LCD Setting correct.
a. Press Select on the LCD.
b. Select Setup Printer and Encoder Settings.
c. Change the Mag Setting from None to Installed.
2 If the encoding data was sent in error, check the appropriate software user’s
manual for encoding instructions.
Resolving the No ENC Response Error Message
Symptom: There is no ENC response.
Step Procedure
1 Check the Magnetic Offset Setting.
a. Press Menu on the LCD.
b. Select Setup Printer and Encoder Settings
c. Select Magnetic TOF.
d. Verify that the current value matches the default value listed on the back of
the Printer.
2 Determine if the Main Board is bad.
a. Replace the Main Board. See the Replacing the Main Board procedure in
Section 5, page Error! Bookmark not defined..
b. Determine if the error repeats itself after replacing the Main Board.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 75
Resolving the Failed Magnetic Encode Error Message
Symptom: The Magnetic Stripe was not encoded properly.
Step Procedure
1 Check to ensure that the cards are loaded with the Magnetic Stripe facing
down and towards the back of the Printer.
2 Verify the Driver Settings.
a. Ensure that the Coercivity setting in the driver corresponds to the type of
cards that are being used.
High Coercivity = 2750 Oersted
Low Coercivity = 300 Oersted
(Note: See the Using the Magnetic Encoding tab procedure in Section 3, page
163.)
Resolving the No Prox Encoder Error Message
Symptom: The Printer is receiving encoding data, but the Printer is not configured with this
Encoder type.
Step Procedure
1 Ensure the LCD Setting correct.
a. Press Select on the LCD.
b. Select Setup Printer and Encoder Settings.
c. Change the Prox Setting from None to Installed.
2 Check the appropriate software user’s manual for specific encoding
instructions if the encoding data was sent in error.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 76
Resolving the No Smart Encoder Error Message
Symptom: The Printer is receiving encoding data, but the Printer is not configured with this
Encoder type.
Step Procedure
1 Ensure the LCD Setting correct.
a. Press Select on the LCD.
b. Select the Setup Printer and Encoder Settings.
c. Change the Smart Setting from None to Installed.
2 Check the software user’s manual for encoding instructions if the encoding
data was sent in error.
Resolving the Failed Smart Encode Error Message
Symptom: The card's smart chip was not encoded properly.
Step Procedure
1 Check to ensure that the cards are loaded with the smart chip facing up and
are being fed into the Printer first.
2 Verify that the card is entering the E-card Docking Station properly..
a. Send an encoding print job from the computer.
b. Watch the card feed into the Printer and enter the E-card Docking Station.
c. Adjust the Flipper Offset (as needed) if the card is not feeding into the E-
card Docking Station properly. See Resolving the Card Jam on the Flipper
Table in Section 2, page 70.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 77
Removing the Card Jam in the Printer’s Magnetic Encoding Area
Symptom: A card is jammed in the magnetic encoding area of the Printer.
Step Procedure
1 Clear the jammed card.
a. Open the Top Cover.
b. Use the arrows on the LCD panel to move the card forward or backward to
free the card.
2 Inspect the Card Feed Roller Motor for proper operation.
a. Leave the power ON and open the Top Lid and Printhead Arm.
b. Press the FORWARD button to advance the card or the BACK button to
reverse the card. Use these buttons to move the card through the Printer.
3 Ensure that the cards are feeding into the Encoding Module properly.
a. Reset power on the Printer to clear any error messages.
b. Select the Menu from the LCD.
c. Select the Print Test Image from the menu. See the Printing the Self-test in
Section 8, page 238.
d. Select the Magnetic Test from the menu. (Note: A card is fed from the
input hopper onto the Flipper table and rotated into the Encoding Module.)
e. If the card appears to jam against the components of the encoding
assembly, adjust the Encoder angle of the Flipper Offset. See the
Resolving the Card Jam on the Flipper Table procedure in Section 2, page
70.
4 Adjust the Flipper Offset.
a. Select Menu on the LCD display.
b. Select Setup Printer.
c. Select Flipper Offset.
d. Select Encoder Angle.
e. Change the setting on the small increments. (Note: A negative adjustment
will lower the side of the Flipper Table closest to the Exit Hopper.)
f. Press Select to save the new value.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 78
Removing the Card Jam in the Printer’s Smart Card Encoding Area
Symptom: A card is jammed in the Smart Card encoding area of the Printer.
Step Procedure
1 Clear the jammed card.
a. Open the Top Cover.
b. Use the arrows on the LCD panel to move the card forward or backward to
free the card.
2 Inspect the Card Feed Roller Motor for proper operation.
a. Leave the power ON and open the Top Lid and Printhead Arm.
b. Press the FORWARD button to advance the card or the BACK button to
reverse the card. (Note: Use these buttons to move the card through the
Printer.)
3 Adjust the Flipper Offset.
a. Select Menu on the LCD display.
b. Select Setup Printer
c. Select Flipper Offset.
d. Select Encoder Angle
e. Change the setting on small increments. (Note: A negative adjustment
will lower the side of the Flipper Table closest to the Exit Hopper.)
f. Press Select to save the new value.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 79
Resolving the Printer not reading Encoded Magnetic Track Data
Step Procedure
1 Verify that the cards are loaded properly with the Magnetic Stripe facing down
and towards the back of the Printer.
2 Verify that the card is encoded with magnetic data by using a magnetic imager
or developer solution.
3 Use WordPad (a Windows 95/ 98/ ME/ NT/ 2000/XP word processing program
in the Accessories Program Group), as shown on the next page.
a. Open the program and type in: ~1%JULIEANDERSON^1234567890?
b. Select File > Page Setup and click on the Printer button.
c. Ensure that the DTC500 Series Card Printer is selected and click on OK.
d. Change all the margin settings to zero (0) and click on OK.
e. Go to File on Menu Bar and select Print. (Note: The Printer should then
feed a card into the Encoder and magnetically encode it.)
4
Caution: Ensure that the Coercivity of the cards matches the setting
in the driver.
5 Compare the settings for the card reader to the settings in the driver.
6
Caution: Ensure that the Magnetic Stripe on the card is free of
scratches or voids.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 80
Resolving the Printer not reading Encoded Magnetic Track Data (continued)
See the previous procedure in this section.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 81
Resolving the Magnetic Stripe Data being printed on a Card
problem
Step Procedure
1 Confirm that the application is formatting the magnetic string correctly. See the
Sending the Track Information procedure in Section 3, page 177.
2 Use WordPad (a Windows 95/ 98/ ME/ NT/ 2000/XP word processing program
in the Accessories Program Group). See previous page for display.
a. Open the program and type: “~1%JULIEANDERSON^1234567890?”
b. Select File > Page Setup and click on the Printer button.
c. Ensure that the DTC500 Series Card Printer is selected and click OK.
d. Change all the margin settings to zero (0) and click OK.
e. Go to File on Menu Bar and select Print. (Note: The Printer should then
feed a card into the Encoder and magnetically encode it.)
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 82
Printing Process Errors
Resolving the Ribbon Alignment Error Message
Step Procedure
1 Check that the Ribbon is loaded properly and completely seated on the hubs.
2 Check that the marks on the Ribbon are complete.
3 a. Check the Motor operation to ensure that the Ribbon moves in both
Forward and Backward directions on Power Up.
b. Check the Ribbon types using the LCD.
4 Test the Ribbon Sensor.
a. Remove the back cover and locate the connector labeled J16 on the main
board.
b. Check the voltage for each of the five (5) Ribbon Sensors at their
connection to the Main Board.
c. Use a Multimeter to ground the negative lead to the chassis and put the
positive lead on pins 3, 5, 7, 9 and 11 of J16 on the main board.
d. Place a RibbonTraq™ mark over the Ribbon Sensor. (Note: The voltage
should be less than 1 VDC.)
e. Remove the RibbonTraq mark from the Ribbon Sensor. (Note: The
voltage should be greater than 4 VDC.)
f. Replace the Sensor if the voltages are incorrect. See the Replacing the
Ribbon Sensor Array Assembly (840108) procedure in Section 5, page
Error! Bookmark not defined..
5 Install a new Ribbon and press the Resume button to continue if the Ribbon is
out.
6 Clear the jam and reboot the Printer if the Ribbon is jammed.
7 Repair the Ribbon.
a. Repair the Ribbon by taping it back on to the take-up core if the Ribbon is
broken.
b. Press the Resume button to continue or Cancel to reset the Printer.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 83
Resolving the Print Ribbon Error Message
Symptom: The Print Ribbon is not installed properly or it has run out, jammed, broken or
been damaged.
Step Procedure
1 See Resolving Ribbon Alignment Errors in Section 2, page 82, for details.
Resolving the Print Ribbon Out Error Message
Symptom: The Print Ribbon has run out.
Step Procedure
1 Install a new Ribbon and press Resume to continue.
Resolving the Ribbon Jam/Broke Error Message
Symptom: An error message is displayed on the LCD and the Ribbon is broken.
Step Procedure
1 Verify that the Print TOF and Print EOF are set correctly.
a. If the break occurs before anything is printed to the card, reduce the Print
TOF by 5.
b. If the break occurs after the yellow panel is transferred to the card, reduce
the Print EOF by 5.
c. Print a self-test to verify operation. See Printing the Self-test in Section 8,
page 238.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 84
Resolving the Wrong Print Ribbon Error Message
Symptom: The Print Ribbon (installed in the Printer) does not match the Ribbon type
(selected in the Printer driver).
Step Procedure
1 Verify that the Ribbon is installed properly by ensuring that:
The Ribbon is loaded with the supply side closest to the Card Input
Hopper.
The Ribbon is rolling from the bottom of the spool to the bottom of the take
up spool.
2 Verify if the Driver has been set correctly.
a. Open the Printer control panel from the computer.
If using Windows 95/98/ME, right click on the DTC500 Series Card
Printer Icon and select Properties.
If using Windows NT 4.0, right click on the DTC500 Series Card Printer
and select Document Defaults.
If using Windows 2000/XP, right click on the DTC500 Series Card
Printer and select Printing Preferences.
b. Click on the Device Option tab. See the Using the Device options tab
procedure in Section 3, page 135.
c. Verify that the Ribbon Type setting that is listed matches the Ribbon that is
installed in the Printer. Note: It may be possible to have Driver settings
that are different from those found in the Printer control panel within the
application.)
d. Check any page setup functions in the software to verify that the Ribbon
type matches.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 85
Resolving the Unknown Ribbon Type Error Message
Symptom: The Printer is unable to determine the type of Ribbon installed.
Step Procedure
1 Verify the Ribbon type.
a. Ensure that the print Ribbon installed in the Printer is a DTC Ribbon.
(Note: Although similar in appearance, an HDP Ribbon installed in a DTC
Printer will produce an Unknown Ribbon Type error message.)
2 Test the Ribbon Sensor (840108).
a. Remove the back cover and locate the connector labeled J16 on the main
board.
b. Check the voltage for each of the five (5) Ribbon Sensors at their
connection to the main board.
c. Use a Multimeter to ground the negative lead to the chassis and put the
positive lead on pins 3, 5, 7, 9 and 11 of J16 on the main board.
d. Place a RibbonTraq™ mark over the Ribbon Sensor. (Note: The voltage
should be less than 1 VDC.)
e. Remove the RibbonTraq mark from the Ribbon Sensor. (Note: The
voltage should be greater than 4 VDC.)
f. Replace the Sensor if the voltages are incorrect. See the Replacing the
Ribbon Sensor Array Assembly (840108) procedure in Section 5, page
Error! Bookmark not defined..
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 86
Resolving the Headlift Error Message
Symptom: The Printer was unable to raise or lower the Printhead.
Step Procedure
1 Press the Resume button to retry.
2 If the Headlift does not rotate, check the Headlift Motor (A000124) to ensure
that it is running.
3 If the Headlift Motor is not running, replace the Headlift Motor. See the
Replacing the Headlift Motor (A000124) procedure in Section 5, page Error!
Bookmark not defined..
4 If the head cycles but does not stop at the position every time, check the
Headlift Sensor as described in Sensor Testing in Section 7, page 232.
5 If the Headlift Sensor is failing, replace it. See the Replacing the Headlift
Sensor (A000126) in Section 5, page Error! Bookmark not defined..
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 87
Resolving the Printer pausing between panels error
Symptom: The Printhead Fan is not operating properly.
Step Procedure
1 Confirm that the fan operates correctly.
a. Upon power up, the fan should run momentarily and shut off.
b. Verify that the fan is plugged into the Main Print Board properly on J13.
2 Check the Printhead fans for pinched wires.
a. Inspect the wires that are routed under the top cover and through to the
back of the board to ensure that they are not pinched.
3. Verify if the thermal Regulator on the Printhead has failed.
a. Remove the Printhead and reseat cable connections. See the Removing
the Original Printhead Assembly procedure in Section 5, page Error!
Bookmark not defined..
b. If problem persists, replace with a new Printhead. See the Replacing the
Printhead Components procedure in Section 5, page Error! Bookmark not
defined..
4 Ensure that the Printer has received data (at the speed that it requires). See
Communication Errors in Section 2, page 53.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 88
Resolving the Printhead Temp Error Message
Symptom: The Printhead Temperature Regulator is not functioning properly.
Step Procedure
1 Reboot the Printer.
If the problem persists, remove the Printhead and ensure that the
Printhead Cables are seated properly. See the Replacing the Printhead
Components procedure in Section 5, page Error! Bookmark not defined..
Remove the back cover (as needed) to verify the Printhead Cable
connection to the Main Print Board. See the Reviewing the Main Board
Components procedure in Section 5, page Error! Bookmark not defined..
2 Replace the Printhead if after checking the Printhead Cable connection at both
the Printhead and the Main Print Board (the error is still displayed on startup).
See the Replacing the Printhead Components procedure in Section 5, page
Error! Bookmark not defined..
3 Confirm that the cooling fan above the Printhead is operating properly. (Note:
Upon power up, the fan should run momentarily and shut off.)
4 Replace the Main Print Board if problem still remains.
See the Replacing the Main Board procedure in Section 5, page Error!
Bookmark not defined..
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 89
Resolving the Flipper Alignment Error Message
Symptom: A Flipper Alignment error was displayed on the LCD.
Step Procedure
1 Check for any obstruction.
a. Open the Top Lid.
b. Remove the Ribbon.
c. Ensure that there are no obstructions.
2 Verify the Motor operation.
a. Test the Flipper Table Home Sensor (140407) by entering the FLIPPER
OFFSET in the PRINTER SETUP menu on the LCD display.
b. Ensure that Level is selected and press the Select button.
c. without making any adjustment, press the Select button.
(Note: This should cause the Flipper Table to attempt to home itself.)
3 Test the Flipper Home Sensor (140407).
a. Remove the screws from the rear cover.
b. Tilt the back cover outwards from the Printer
c. Using a Digital Voltmeter, connect the negative lead to its ground.
d. Connect the positive lead to Pin 4 of J7.
If blocked, the voltage should read 3.2 VDC.
If unblocked, the Sensor should read > .4 VDC.
e. If the voltages from the Flipper Home Sensor do not match, replace the
Sensor. See the Replacing the Flipper Home Sensor (140407) procedure
in Section 5, page Error! Bookmark not defined..
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 90
Firmware Errors
Resolving the Update Firmware Now
The system Firmware must be updated for one of these reasons:
The previous Firmware update was unsuccessful.
The program data is corrupt.
The Printer model does not correspond with the installed Firmware model number.
The revision number of the Firmware does not match on all system components.
See the Updating the Printer’s Firmware procedure in Section 9, page 259.
Resolving an Upgrade Failed error
Symptom: An Upgrade Failed error is displayed on the LCD during the upgrade process
Step Procedure
1 Determine if there is interference from an external device.
a. Do not use an A/B Switch Box, dongle key or other peripheral in line with
the parallel cable.
b. If using a Switch Box, dongle key or other peripheral, remove it while
testing communication between the computer and the Printer.
c. If needed, replace the Switch Box, dongle key or other peripheral (once it is
determined that the cause of the interference is not the Switch Box or
peripheral). See the Updating the Main Firmware procedure in Section 9,
page 259.
Alternative: Add a second Parallel Port into the computer (if a second Printer
is required).
Continued on the next page.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 91
Resolving an Upgrade Failed error (continued)
Step Procedure
2 Ensure that the proper procedure is being used. See the Firmware Updater
Application Program procedure in Section 9, page 256.
a. Follow the instructions on the attached DTC Firmware Upgrade Guide to
insure that the correct data is being transferred to the Printer.
b. If the Firmware Update Program is corrupt, then uninstall the entire
program from the PC and download the newest version of the program
and install it from Fargo’s web site via:
http://www.fargo.com
See the Downloading Firmware Updates procedure in Section 9, page 258.
See the next page.
3 Update from the 32-bit Print Spooler.
a. Install and open the 32-bit Print Spooler program.
b. Click on File in the menu and select the Open option.
c. Point this window to the directory (where the latest Firmware is located on
the PC). (Note: This Firmware file will always have a *.s19 extension)
d. Once the Firmware file is selected, the Printer needs to be restarted into
SYSTEM UPGRADE mode. Follow this procedure:
At the PRINTER READY screen, select the Menu option.
Press the DOWN arrow, until the brackets are around the “System
Upgrade”.
Press the Select option.
Select YES when the screen displays: Are you sure you want to
continue? (Note: When the Printer reboots, it will be in System
Upgrade mode and will begin to count up from 0 seconds to 60 sec.)
Click the Print button on the 32-bit Print Spooler as the DTC LCD
display begins its countdown. (Note: The DTC Display should then run
through its Update process. See the next page.)
e. Reboot the Printer after it has completed the process.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 92
Resolving an Upgrade Failed error (continued)
See the previous procedure in this section.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 93
Resolving a Program Exception Error
Symptom: An error has occurred in the Printers Firmware and a Program Exception Error.
Step Procedure
1 Restart the Printer and attempt to print the card again.
a. If no Error is displayed, continue printing.
b. If a Program Exception is displayed again, continue to step 2.
2 Reload the Firmware. See the Updating the Printer's Firmware in Section 10,
page 259.
3 Replace the Main Board. See the Replacing the Main Board procedure in
Section 5, page Error! Bookmark not defined..
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 94
Diagnosing the Image Problems
Resolving the Pixel failure problems
Symptom: A thin line or scratch travels the entire length of the card.
Step Procedure
1 Check the card stock for scratches. Replace the cards (as needed).
2 Examine the Printhead for visible damage.
3 Clean the Printhead.
a. Remove watches, rings, bracelets and other jewelry.
b. Open the Top Cover and Printhead Arm.
c. Use a Printhead Cleaning Pen from the Printer Cleaning Kit to firmly wipe
back and forth across the surface of the Printhead.
d. Close the Top Cover and Printhead Arm once the Printhead is completely
dry.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 95
Resolving the Pixel failure problems (continued)
Step Procedure
4 Replace the Cleaning Tape.
a. Open the Printer's Top Cover.
b. Pull the Cleaning Cartridge out of the Printer.
c. Open the Cleaning Cartridge by pressing on the release tab of the clear
Cleaning Cartridge Cover and pulling the cover up.
d. Pull up on the used cleaning tape and lift it and the two Tape Rollers out of
the Cartridge. (Note: The Cleaning Roller can stay within the Cartridge.)
e. Insert the two Tape Rollers into the new Cleaning Tape loop.
f. Place the Tape Rollers and the new tape back into the cartridge.
Be sure to orient the new tape loop so that it extends over the Cleaning
Roller once installed.
Place the Roller closest to the cartridge's handle in first and then press
the second Roller into place.
g. Set the clear Cleaning Cartridge Cover back into place.
Be sure the tabs on the cover are seated properly into the slots on the
cartridge as shown below.
When in place, press down on the top of the cover until it snaps shut.
h. Pull on the tape loop's tab to remove the backing from the tape.
i. Insert the Cleaning Cartridge back into the Printer.
Be sure to push down on the cartridge until it clicks into place.
If the cartridge is not inserted properly, the Printer will not feed cards.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 96
Resolving the Pixel failure problems (continued)
Step Procedure
5 Clean the Platen Rollers.
a. Leave the Printer power ON and open the Top Cover and Printhead Arm.
b. Remove the print Ribbon.
c. Locate the Print Platen Roller, as shown below.
d. Use a Cleaning Pad from the Printer Cleaning Kit to wipe the Roller clean.
e. Locate the Transfer Platen Roller, as shown below.
f. Use a Cleaning Pad from the Printer Cleaning Kit to wipe the Roller clean.
Press the FORWARD and BACK buttons to move the Roller back and
forth while cleaning.
g. Replace the printing supplies.
h. Close the Print and Transfer Stations after the Rollers are clean and
completely dry.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 97
Resolving the Card surface debris problems
Symptom: Prints have spots (white or colored voids) and/or dust on them, as shown after
Step 4 in this procedure.
Step Procedure
1 Be sure the cards are clean and stored in a dust-free environment.
Caution: Cards with embedded contaminants in the surface should
not be used.
2 Clean the inside of the Printer.
a. Open the Top Cover and Printhead Arm.
b. Remove the print Ribbon from the Printer.
c. Use a can of compressed air to blow out all visible areas of the Printer
interior.
d. Use a cleaning pad from the Printer Cleaning Kit to wipe out all visible areas
inside the Printer.
e. Remove any debris that may be inside.
Caution: Be extremely careful not to let any alcohol drip inside the
Printer!
f. Re-install the printing supplies.
g. Close the Top Cover and Printhead Arm.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 98
Resolving the Card surface debris problems (continued)
Step Procedure
3 Replace the Cleaning Tape.
a. Open the Printer's Top Cover.
b. Pull the Cleaning Cartridge out of the Printer.
c. Open the Cleaning Cartridge by pressing on the release tab of the clear
Cleaning Cartridge Cover and pulling the cover up.
d. Pull up on the used cleaning tape and lift it and the two Tape Rollers out of the
Cartridge. (Note: The Cleaning Roller can stay within the Cartridge.)
e. Insert the two Tape Rollers into the new Cleaning Tape loop.
f. Place the Tape Rollers and the new tape back into the cartridge. (Note: Be
sure to orient the new tape loop so that it extends over the Cleaning Roller
once it is installed.)
g. Place the Roller closest to the cartridge's handle.
h. Press the second Roller into place.
i. Set the clear Cleaning Cartridge Cover back into place.
Caution: Be sure the tabs on the cover are seated properly into the slots
on the cartridge as shown below.
j. When in place, press down on the top of the cover until it snaps shut.
k. Pull on the tape loop's tab to remove the backing from the tape.
l. Insert the Cleaning Cartridge back into the Printer.
Caution: Be sure to push down on the cartridge until it clicks into place.
If the cartridge is not inserted properly, the Printer will not feed cards.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 99
Resolving the Card surface debris problems (continued)
Step Procedure
4 Clean the Platen Roller.
a. Leave the Printer power ON and open the Top Cover and Printhead Arm.
b. Remove the print Ribbon.
c. Locate the Platen Roller, as shown below.
d. Use a Cleaning Pad from the Printer Cleaning Kit to wipe the Roller clean.
e. Press the FORWARD and BACK buttons to move the Roller back and forth
while cleaning.
f. Replace the printing supplies and close the Top Cover and Printhead Arm after
the Rollers are clean and completely dry.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 100
Resolving the incorrect Image Darkness problems
Symptom: Printed cards are too dark or too light, as shown on the next page.
Step Procedure
1 Run a Self-Test from the Printer. See the Printing the Self-test in Section 8, page
238.
a. Select Menu from the LCD.
b. Select Print Test Image from the menu.
c. Select Gray/Align Self-test from the Menu.
d. If the Self test card does not appear to have the same darkness issues,
continue to step 2 (Adjusting the Dye sub intensity).
e. If the Self test card does appear to have the same darkness issues, continue
to step 3 (Adjusting the image darkness).
2 Adjust the Dye-Sub Intensity setting within the Image Color tab of the Printer
driver. See the Using the Image Color tab procedure in Section 3, page 148.
a. Open the Printer control panel from the computer.
If using Windows 95/98/ME, right click on the DTC500 Series Card Printer
Icon and select Properties.
If using Windows NT 4.0, right click on the DTC500 Series Card Printer and
select Document Defaults.
If using Windows 2000/XP, right click on the DTC500 Series Card Printer
and select Printing Preferences.
b. Click on the Image Color tab.
If the image is too light, adjust the Dye-Sub Intensity to a more positive
value.
If the Image is too dark, adjust the Dye-Sub Intensity to a more negative
value.
OR
Correct the Image Darkness in the LCD. See the Adjusting the Image Darkness
procedure in Section 8, page 248.
a. Select Menu from the LCD.
b. Select Setup Printer and then select Image Darkness.
If the image is too light, adjust the current value to a more positive number.
If the Image is too dark, adjust the current value to a more negative
number.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 101
Resolving the incorrect Image Darkness problems (continued)
See previous procedure in this section.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 102
Resolving the incorrect Image Darkness problems (continued)
See previous procedure in this section.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 103
Resolving the Ribbon wrinkle problems
Symptom: Printed cards have off-colored lines or streaks on them, as shown on the next
page.
Step Procedure
1 Confirm that the Printer is using the most current driver from:
http://www.fargo.com
2 Adjust the Dye-Sub Intensity setting within the Image Color tab of the Printer
driver. See the Using the Image Color tab procedure in Section 3, page 148.
a. Open the Printer control panel from the computer.
If using Windows 95/98/ME, right click on the DTC500 Series Card
Printer Icon and select Properties.
If using Windows NT 4.0, right click on the DTC500 Series Card Printer
and select Document Defaults.
If using Windows 2000/XP, right click on the DTC500 Series Card Printer
and select Printing Preferences.
b. Click on the Image Color tab.
c. Adjust the Dye-Sub Intensity to a more negative value in increments of 10%.
OR
Correct the Image Darkness in the LCD. See the Adjusting the Image Darkness
procedure in Section 8, page 248.
a. Select Menu from the LCD.
b. Select Setup Printer and then select Image Darkness.
c. Adjust the current value to a more negative number in increments of 2.
3 Adjust the Ribbon Tension. See the Adjusting the Ribbon Tension procedure in
Section 8, page 246.
a. Select Menu from the LCD.
b. Select Setup Printer and then select Ribbon Tension.
c. Adjust the current value to a more positive number.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 104
Resolving the Ribbon wrinkle problems (continued)
Step Procedure
5 Check the Printhead for debris and burrs.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 105
Resolving the excessive Resin Printing problems
Symptom: Black resin text and barcodes appear smeared or too thick, as shown below.
Step Procedure
1 Reduce the Resin Heat setting within the Image Color tab of the Printer driver.
See the Using the Image Color tab procedure in Section 3, page 148. See the
next page.
a. Open the Printer Control Panel from the computer.
If using Windows 95/98/ME, right click on the DTC500 Series Card
Printer Icon and select Properties.
If using Windows NT 4.0, right click on the DTC500 Series Card Printer
and select Document Defaults.
If using Windows 2000/XP, right click on the DTC500 Series Card Printer
and select Printing Preferences.
b. Click on the Image Color tab.
c. Adjust the Resin Heat to a more negative value in increments of 5%.
OR
Correct the Image Darkness in the LCD. See the Adjusting the Image Darkness
procedure in Section 8, page 248. See the next page.
a. Select Menu from the LCD.
b. Select Setup Printer and then select Image Darkness.
c. Adjust the current value to a more negative number in increments of 2.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 106
Resolving the excessive Resin Printing problems (continued)
See the previous procedure in this section.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 107
Resolving the incomplete Resin Printing problems
Symptom: Black resin text and barcodes appear faded or too light, as shown below.
Step Procedure
1 Reduce the Resin Heat setting within the Image Color tab of the Printer driver.
See the Using the Image Color tab procedure in Section 3, page 148. See the
next page.
a. Open the Printer control panel from the computer.
If using Windows 95/98/ME, right click on the DTC500 Series Card
Printer Icon and select Properties.
If using Windows NT 4.0, right click on the DTC500 Series Card Printer
and select Document Defaults.
If using Windows 2000/XP, right click on the DTC500 Series Card Printer
and select Printing Preferences.
b. Click on the Image Color tab.
c. Adjust the Resin Heat to a more positive value in increments of 5%.
OR
Correct the Image Darkness in the LCD. See the Adjusting the Image Darkness
procedure in Section 8, page 248. See the next page.
a. Select Menu from the LCD.
b. Select Setup Printer and then select Image Darkness.
c. Adjust the current value to a more positive number in increments of 2.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 108
Resolving the incomplete Resin Printing problems (continued)
See the previous procedure in this section.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 109
Resolving the cut off or off-center Card Image problems
Symptom: The printing is cut off or is not centered on the card. This causes a white border
to appear on the card, as shown below.
Step Procedure
1 Use the Image Position within the Card tab of the Printer driver to precisely
center the image. See Using the Image Position button in Section 3, page 206.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 110
Resolving the poor Image Quality problems
Symptom: The photos on the cards look pixilated or grainy, as shown below.
Step Procedure
1 Use a high-resolution, 24-bit color image to always capture an image:
at a 24-bit color setting
at 300 dpi
at the same size that it will be printed on the card, (as captured either with a
scanner or with a digital camera)
Caution: If a small or low-resolution image is stretched or blown up, a
pixilated or grainy effect will occur when printing, as shown below.
Good Bad
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 111
Printing a Test Image
Step Procedure
1 Choose Print Test Image to select a preset test image. (Note: These images
help to determine if the Printer is functioning properly.)
2 Scroll to the desired test image from the Select Test Image options and press the
Select button.
Reviewing the Gray/Align YMC/K Self-Test
Step Procedure
1 Use this card to determine Image Placement and confirm that the Printer is
working properly. (Note: The image consists of sixteen (16) gray scale boxes and
alignment arrows.)
2 Adjust the Image Placement. (Note: The gray boxes are composed from a
composite of YMC color panels.)
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 112
Reviewing the Color/Resin YMCK Self-Test
Step Procedure
1 Use this card to determine Image Placement and confirm that (a) the image colors
are properly reproduced and (b) the Resin Panel is printing properly. (Note: The
Image consists of twelve spot colors, YMC and RGB, as well as gray density bars
and thin resin lines.)
Reviewing the Color Bars YMC Self-Test
Step Procedure
1 Use this card to confirm that image colors are properly reproduced. Image consists
of sixteen graduated steps of RGB and YMCK. (Note: This print will provide
maximum image size, giving complete card coverage on a CR-80 sized card.)
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 113
Reviewing the Card Count Self-Test
Step Procedure
1 Use this card to view counts for Card Count (CC), Pass Count (PC) and Transfer
Count (TC) and Lamination Count (LC).
The Card Count is the total number of cards the Printer has produced. Pass
Count is the total number of print passes made by the Printhead. (Note: A
pass is measured each time a single Ribbon panel is printed or passes
beneath the Printhead.)
The Transfer Count is the total number of times the Printer transfers an image
to a card.
Reviewing the Magnetic Test option
Step Procedure
1 Use this option only applies if a Magnetic Encoding module is installed in the
Printer. (Note: The Printer will feed, encode and eject a card. Be sure to have
high Coercivity cards installed when running this test.)
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 114
Section 3: Card Lamination Module
The purpose of this section is to provide the User with specific information on Printer
adjustment procedures.
Safety Messages (review carefully)
Symbol Critical Instructions for Safety purposes
Danger:
Failure to follow these installation guidelines can result in death or
serious injury.
Information that raises potential safety issues is indicated by a warning
symbol (as shown to the below).
To prevent personal injury, refer to the following safety messages
before performing an operation preceded by this symbol.
To prevent personal injury, always remove the power cord prior to
performing repair procedures, unless otherwise specified.
To prevent personal injury, make sure only qualified personnel
perform these procedures.
Caution:
This device is electrostatically sensitive. It may be damaged if
exposed to static electricity discharges.
Information that raises potential electrostatic safety issues is indicated by a
warning symbol (as shown to the below).
To prevent equipment or media damage, refer to the following safety
messages before performing an operation preceded by this symbol.
To prevent equipment or media damage, observe all established
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) procedures while handling cables in or
near the Circuit Board and Printhead Assemblies.
To prevent equipment or media damage, always wear an appropriate
personal grounding device (e.g., a high quality wrist strap grounded to
avoid potential damage).
To prevent equipment or media damage, always remove the Ribbon
and Cards from the Printer before making any repairs, unless otherwise
specified.
To prevent equipment or media damage, take jewelry off of fingers
and hands, as well as thoroughly clean hands to remove oil and debris
before working on the Printer.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 115
Loading the Overlaminate
The loading process for both the Thermal Transfer Film and the PolyGuard overlaminate
material is the same. Refer to the following steps to load either type of overlaminate into the
Printer.
Danger: Do not touch the metal lamination shield or the Lamination Roller when
loading overlaminate. You will burn yourself.
Step Procedure
1 Open the lamination module's Top Cover and Lamination Station.
2 Remove the overlaminate from its packaging.
3 The supply end of the overlaminate roll is the side containing the fresh, unused
portion of the overlaminate. The take-up end is the other side.
Continued on the next page
Supply Roll
Take-Up Roll
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 116
Loading the Overlaminate (continued)
Step Procedure
4 Place the supply end of the overlaminate roll in between the two black
Lamination Drive Hubs. (Note: The smaller Lamination Drive Hub closest to the
front of the lamination module is spring loaded. Use the end of the supply roll
with the black core plug to push this hub in when inserting the overlaminate roll.
Make certain the overlaminate material is fed from beneath the roll as shown.)
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 117
Loading the Overlaminate (continued)
Step Procedure
5 Close the lamination module. When you start to print, the Lamination Drive Hubs
will automatically engage the overlaminate core notches.
Caution: Do not reverse the overlaminate roll. Damage may occur to
the lamination Roller!
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 118
Adjusting the Card Lamination Module
The Card Printer supports the attachment of an optional Card Lamination Module. This
module can be ordered pre-installed on the Printer from the factory or can be ordered
separately as a field upgradeable module. Once attached, the Card Lamination Module
allows you to apply Fargo certified overlaminates for more secure, tamper-resistant cards.
This section explains all aspects of the Card Lamination Module's operation and the
overlaminate materials available.
IMPORTANT! Fargo Card Printers require highly specialized print Ribbons to function
properly. To maximize Printer life, reliability, printed card quality and durability, you must use
only Fargo Certified Supplies. For this reason, your Fargo warranty is void, where not
prohibited by law, if you use non-Fargo Certified Supplies. To order additional materials,
please contact your authorized reseller.
Adjusting the Card Flattener
The Card Lamination Module provides an adjustable Card Flattener that allows you to fine-
tune the flatness of laminated cards. This flattener works by reverse bending cards as they
eject from the laminator while they are still warm.
In most cases, card warpage is only a concern when laminating on a single side of card
stock which has a PVC-based core rather than a polyester-based core. Cards with a PVC-
based core are not as heat resistant and are not recommended for use when laminating
By default, the Card Flattener is configured at the factory to accommodate UltraCard III type
card stock. (Note: If you are experiencing an unacceptable amount of card warpage, please
refer to the following to adjust the Card Flattener.)
Step Procedure
1 Open the Card Lamination Module.
2 Remove the overlaminate material if installed.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 119
Adjusting the Card Flattener (continued)
Step Procedure
3 If laminated cards are bowing upward, turn the Card Flattener Adjustment Knob
clockwise. (Note: This pushes the flattener Roller down to increase the reverse
bending pressure. For best results, turn the knob one full rotation, then print and
laminate a test card. Repeat this process as necessary.)
4 If the card is bowing downward, the reverse bending pressure may be too great.
In this case, rotate the adjustment knob counter-clockwise. (Note: Some card
types have very low heat resistance and may not be acceptable for laminating.)
Adjustment
Knob
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 120
Adjusting the Card Guide Rail
If applying PolyGuard overlaminate, you may find that the individual patch from the
overlaminate roll may be off-center when applied to a card. (Note: Although the patch
placement will vary slightly from card to card, they should never hang over the edge of the
card.) See the Using the Lamination tab (only with Card Lamination Module) procedure in
Section 4, page 209.
To center the vertical placement of these patches across the card width, a mechanical
adjustment can be made. If the PolyGuard patches are being applied too closely to or
overlapping, a card's top or bottom edge (as the card travels through the Printer), the
laminator's Card Guide Rail should be adjusted. (Note: This adjustment is described below.)
Step Procedure
1 Open the lamination module's Top Cover and Lamination Station.
2 a. Feed a blank card into the module by inserting it through the output hopper
and reverse feeding it by pressing the Lamination module's Resume button.
b. Manually position the card so its edge is flush with the Card Guide Rail.
Continued on the next page
Card Guide Rail
Blank Card
Screws
Card Flipping
Mechanism
CR100
CR90
CR80
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 121
Adjusting the Card Guide Rail (continued)
Step Procedure
3 Slightly loosen the two (2) screws which fasten the Card Guide Rail to the
Printer's main chassis.
4 If the PolyGuard patch is being placed more toward a card's top edge (as
shown), move the Card Guide Rail slightly toward the rear of the Printer
(opposite the direction you would like the patch to move).
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 122
Adjusting the Card Guide Rail (continued)
Step Procedure
5 If the PolyGuard patch is being placed more toward a card's bottom edge (as
shown), move the Card Guide Rail slightly toward the front of the Printer
(opposite the direction you would like the patch to move).
6 Always make very slight adjustments to the Card Guide Rail and run a test print
after each adjustment until the optimum patch position is found. (Note: Be sure
the Card Guide Rail always remains parallel to the card path and that the screws
loosened in step 1 are retightened after each adjustment.)
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 123
Adjusting the Card Guide Rail (continued)
Step Procedure
7 Once the adjustment is complete, be sure that the card is not binding between
the Card Guide Rail and the Internal Card Guide. (Note: Depending upon how
much you adjusted the Card Guide Rail, you may also need to adjust the Internal
Card Guide.)
When both are adjusted properly, there should be a slight space of about
.010"/.25mm between the card edge and the Internal Card Guide as indicated
here:
8 If necessary, adjust the Internal Card Guide as described in the remainder of this
section.
.010“/.25mm
space
Internal Card Guide
CR100
CR90
CR80
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 124
Adjusting the Internal Card Guide
The Internal Card Guide is what holds the card in position as it feeds through the Card
Lamination Module.
Step Procedure
1 Feed a blank card into the module by inserting it through the Output Hopper
and reverse feeding it by pressing the lamination module's Resume button.
Manually position the card so its edge is flush with the Card Guide Rail.
Continued on the next page
Blank Card
Screws
Internal Card Guide
CR100
CR90
CR80
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 125
Adjusting the Internal Card Guide (continued)
Step Procedure
2 Slightly loosen the two screws which fasten the Internal Card Guide to the
Printer's main chassis.
3 Move the Internal Card Guide so there is a slight space of about .010"/.25mm
between the card edge and the Internal Card Guide as indicated below.
When adjusting the Internal Card Guide, be sure it always remains parallel to
the Card Guide Rail and card edge.
4 Always make very slight adjustments to the Internal Card Guide and run a test
print after each adjustment until the optimum position is found. (Note: Be sure
the Internal Card Guide always remains parallel to the card path and that the
screws loosened in Step 1 are retightened after each adjustment.)
.010“/.25mm
space
Internal Card Guide
CR100
CR90
CR80
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 126
Attaching the Card Lamination Module
The Card Lamination Module can be attached to select Printer models (DTC525 only) as a
field upgradeable option. This can typically be done in 20 minutes or less and with no other
tools than a phillips screw driver. Please refer to the following steps to attach this module.
This section applies only if you are installing the field upgradeable Card Lamination Module
onto a Printer. Your Printer model must be capable of accepting this module as not all Printer
models are compatible with this field upgradeable option. If you have questions about
compatibility, please contact your authorized Fargo reseller.
Step Procedure
1 Remove the Card Lamination Module from its packaging.
2 Disconnect the power cable from the Printer.
3 Remove the Card Output Hopper from the Printer. (Note: To do this, pull out
on the Securing Tab located on the bottom of the Printer and slide the Card
Output Hopper completely out of the Printer.)
Continued on the next page
Securing Tab
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 127
Attaching the Card Lamination Module (continued)
Step Procedure
4 Set the Printer on the lamination module's Baseplate at an angle as shown.
(Note: This position will make it easier to connect the Power and
Communication cables.)
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 128
Attaching the Card Lamination Module (continued)
Step Procedure
5 a. Connect the lamination module's Power Cable to the Printer's Power Port.
(Note: both are labeled with a red Power label.)
b. Push firmly to ensure both are securely connected. (Note: The port and
cable are keyed for one way installation.)
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 129
Attaching the Card Lamination Module (continued)
Step Procedure
6 Set the Printer completely into the lamination module's Baseplate. (Note: The
rubber pads on the bottom of the Printer will rest securely in the holes in the
lamination module's Baseplate when the Printer is seated properly.)
Continued on the next page
Rubber pads
through Baseplate
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 130
Attaching the Card Lamination Module (continued)
Step Procedure
7 Gently tilt the entire Printer and Lamination Module back onto its rear cover, as
shown below. (Note: Be careful not to slide the unit around in this position as
scratching could occur.)
8 Using a Phillips screw driver, insert each of the four (4) screws into the
Baseplate and tighten the screws to secure the Printer to the Lamination
Module's Baseplate.
Continued on the next page
4 screws to secure
printer to Baseplate
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 131
Attaching the Card Lamination Module (continued)
Step Procedure
10 While being careful not to scratch the plastic cover, remove the Fargo DTC525
model number label from the front of the Printer and replace it with the
included Fargo DTC525-LC model number label. (Note: This is important so
users know the exact Printer model when ordering supplies, when calling for
technical assistance or when downloading Printer Driver/Firmware Updates.)
11 If you have not already done so, install the LC version of your Printer model's
Printer Drive.
For lamination-related Printer Driver options, see the Using the Lamination
tab (only with Card Lamination Module) in Section 4, page 209.
For overlaminate information, see the Reviewing the Overlaminates in
Section 1, page 42 and Loading the Overlaminate in Section 3, page 115.
The packaging for the Card Lamination Module has been designed to
accommodate shipping either the lamination module-only or the fully
assembled Printer with lamination module.
After assembling the complete Printer/lamination system, please re-use the
lamination module packaging when transporting the unit.
12 Once all print supplies are installed, run a test print to make sure installation
was successful.
You must have PolyGuard™ overlaminate and a full-color print Ribbon
installed to print this test image.
To test, go to the Printer’s LCD display and select MENU, PRINT TEST
IMAGE and run the lamination Self Test named: Color/Resin YMCK+L.
The test image will begin printing after a few seconds and will both print
and laminate the card.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 132
Section 4: Printer Adjustments
The purpose of this section is to provide the User with specific information on Printer
adjustment procedures.
Safety Messages (review carefully)
Symbol Critical Instructions for Safety purposes
Danger:
Failure to follow these installation guidelines can result in death or
serious injury.
Information that raises potential safety issues is indicated by a warning
symbol (as shown to the below).
To prevent personal injury, refer to the following safety messages
before performing an operation preceded by this symbol.
To prevent personal injury, always remove the power cord prior to
performing repair procedures, unless otherwise specified.
To prevent personal injury, make sure only qualified personnel
perform these procedures.
Caution:
This device is electrostatically sensitive. It can be damaged if
exposed to static electricity discharges.
Information that raises potential electrostatic safety issues is indicated by a
warning symbol (as shown to the below).
To prevent equipment or media damage, refer to the following safety
messages before performing an operation preceded by this symbol.
To prevent equipment or media damage, observe all established
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) procedures while handling cables in or
near the Circuit Board and Printhead Assemblies.
To prevent equipment or media damage, always wear an appropriate
personal grounding device (e.g., a high quality wrist strap grounded to
avoid potential damage).
To prevent equipment or media damage, always remove the Ribbon
and Cards from the Printer before making any repairs, unless otherwise
specified.
To prevent equipment or media damage, take jewelry off of fingers
and hands, as well as thoroughly clean hands to remove oil and debris
before working on the Printer.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 133
Safety Messages (review carefully) (continued)
IMPORTANT! Fargo Card Printers require highly specialized print Ribbons to function
properly. To maximize Printer life, reliability, printed card quality and durability, you must use
only Fargo Certified Supplies. For this reason, your Fargo warranty is void, where not
prohibited by law, if you use non-Fargo Certified Supplies. To order additional materials,
please contact your authorized reseller.
Adjusting the Internal Card Guide
The Internal Card Guide holds the card in position as it feeds through the Printer. This guide
is factory-set to handle both CR-79 sized cards and standard CR-80 sized cards (with
thicknesses ranging from 20 to 50 mil).
Securing Peg
Internal Card
Guide
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 134
Adjusting the Internal Card Guide (continued)
Step Procedure
1 If loading CR-80, 10 mil cards, adjust this guide (as needed) to accommodate very
thin, flexible card stock.
2 Open the Printer's Top Cover and Print Station.
3 Rotate the guide's Securing Peg until it is parallel to the card guide and push it
down. (Note: This widens the card path so it holds thinner cards with less force.)
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 135
Printer Driver options
These Driver options and pictures are from the DTC500 Series driver (Version 1.3.3).
Using the Device options tab
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 136
Adjusting for the Ribbon Type
Use the Ribbon Type dropdown menu to match the Ribbon type.
Step
Procedure
1 Adjust to match the Ribbon Type selection with the Ribbon Type already loaded in
the Printer. See the Printer Components: Print Ribbons description in Section 1,
page 25.
YMCKO: Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Resin Black, Overlay
OR,
YMCKOK: Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Resin Black, Overlay, Resin Black
OR,
BO: Dye Sub Black, Overlay
OR
K: Standard or Premium Resin
OR
Colored Resin: Colored Resin is available in Red, Blue, Green or White
OR
Metallic Resin: Metallic Resin is available in Gold or Silver
OR
Scratch-Off Resin
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 137
Adjusting for the Color matching
Use the Color Matching option to meet the requirements for the print job.
Step Procedure
1 Select None (a) if interested in print speed rather than print color, (b) if color
correcting the image for printing has already been done or (c) if using third party
Color Matching software.
OR
Select Algebraic to allow the Printer driver to make very simple, fast, color
balance adjustments. (Note: This option gives a natural-looking image without
slowing down the processing speed of the Printer driver. It also allows further
customization of the printed color of the cards through the Image Color tab.)
OR
Select Monitor to allow the Printer driver to make color corrections similar to the
Algebraic option but through an RGB color matching algorithm. (Note: This
option shifts colors more radically so the colors in the image will more closely
match how they appear on screen.)
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 138
Adjusting for the Resin Dither
Use the appropriate Dither method according to the type of image to be printed. (Note: This
option only affects those objects printed with the resin black panel.)
Step Procedure
1 Select Optimized for Graphics when printing lower quality images (e.g., clipart,
logos, etc.) with resin.
OR
Select Optimized for Photo when printing photo quality images with resin.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 139
Using the Print Both Sides option (DTC520/DTC525 only)
Use this option to automatically print on both the front and backside of a card.
Step Procedure
1 Select this option in conjunction with any application program that supports a
multiple-page document, duplex printing. (Note: The program must be able to
send down two or more separate pages to be printed within the same
document.)
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 140
Using the Split 1 Set of Ribbon Panels option (DTC520/DTC525
only)
Use this option to provide the most economical means of printing a dual-sided card since a
single set of Ribbon panels is essentially split to print both the front and backsides of a card.
Step Procedure
1 Select this option to automatically print full-color (on the front of a card) and resin
black (on the back of a card), using either of the Full-Color YMCKO or YMCKOK
print Ribbons.
YMCKO Ribbon type usage: The front of the card is printed with the
Ribbon's YMC and O panels and the back is printed with the K panel.
YMCKOK Ribbon type usage: The front of the card is printed with the
YMCKO panels and the back is printed with the second K panel.
(Note #1: This option is automatically enabled when the YMCKOK Ribbon type
is selected.)
(Note #2: The Print Both Sides option is automatically enabled when this
option is selected.)
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 141
Using the Print Back Side First option
Step Procedure
1 Select this option if you need to print the first page of a two-page document on
the backside of the card.
The second page of the document will be printed on the front side of the card.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 142
Using the Print on Back Side Only option (DTC520/DTC525 only)
Use this option to print only onto the backside of cards.
Step Procedure
1 Select this option to print only onto the backside of cards that must have their
Magnetic Stripe or Smart Card chip encoded. (Note: Load the cards in the usual
fashion.)
When this option is selected, the Print Both Sides option is automatically
disabled.)
When attempting to print a two-page document (if Print Back Side Only is
selected), the first page of the document will print on the backside of the card.
The second page of the document will then be printed on the back of a second
card.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 143
Using the Rotate Front by 180 Degrees option
Use this option to change the position of the printed image in relation to the set location of a
card's Magnetic Stripe or smart chip.
Step Procedure
1 Select the Rotate Front 180 Degrees option to rotate the image on the front of
the card by 180 degrees when printed.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 144
Using the Rotate Back by 180 Degrees option (DTC520/DTC525
only)
Use this option to change the position of the printed image in relation to the set location of a
card's Magnetic Stripe or smart chip.
Step Procedure
1 Select the Rotate Back 180 Degrees option to rotate the image on the back of
the card by 180 degrees when printed.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 145
Using the Buffer Single Card option
Use this option to force the Printer's memory to Buffer or to hold only one print job at a time.
Step Procedure
1 Select this option only when printing to multiple Printers sharing print jobs over a
network, which ensures that all Printers evenly share all print jobs.
OR
Do not select this option and the Printer's memory will Buffer as many print jobs
as possible until the Printer's memory is full. (Note: This is ideal for most
applications where Printers are not networked together.)
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 146
Using the Link Card to Print Job option
Use this option to link a specific card to a specific print job. This option is used when printing
and encoding e-cards.
Caution: In this case, it is often critical that an e-card with a pre-encoded serial
number, for example, coincide with a particular printed image. If the two were to get out of
sync, the card's security could be compromised.
Step Procedure
1 Select this option to cause the Printer to dispense with the print job if a blank card
is removed or ejected. (Note: The next card is then fed into the Printer and the
next coinciding print job then printed.)
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 147
Using the Disable Printing option
Use this option to disable the printing capabilities of the Printer, yet still allow the Printer to
encode cards. (Note: This option is useful to encode or re-encode cards without additional
time, effort or printing supplies.)
Step Procedure
1 Select this option to ensure no print data will be sent to the Printer (while all
encoding instructions will be sent according to how they are configured within the
software).
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 148
Using the Image Color tab
Use this tab to adjust the color properties.
Step Procedure
1 Select the Algebraic Color Matching option (see the Device options tab window,
shown below) to control the Contrast and Gamma of the printed image, as well as
the individual color balance of Yellow, Magenta and Cyan (see the Image Color
tab window, shown below).
In most cases, the default settings of these options will suffice.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 149
Using the Image Color tab (continued)
Step Procedure
2 Select the None or Monitor option (see the Device options tab, shown below) to
only display the Dye-Sub Intensity and Resin Heat sliders.
3 Control the overall darkness and lightness of the dye-sub printed image by
adjusting the Dye-Sub Intensity slide by clicking and dragging the slide's box.
Move the slide to the left to cause less heat to be used in the printing process,
thus generating a lighter print.
OR
Move the slide to the right to cause more heat to be used, thus generating a
darker print.
(Note: This slide only affects those images printed with Dye-Sublimation Ribbon
panels (YMC).)
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 150
Using the Image Color tab (continued)
Step Procedure
4 Control the amount of heat the Printer uses (a) when printing with the resin black
panel of a full-color Ribbon or (b) when printing with a resin-only Ribbon by
adjusting the Resin Heat slide. See the Printer Components: Print Ribbons
description in Section 1, page 25.
Move the slide to the left to cause less heat to be used in the printing process,
causing resin images to be lighter or less saturated.
OR
Move the slide to the right to cause more heat to be used, causing resin
images to be darker or more saturated.
(Note: This control can be helpful for fine-tuning the sharpness of resin text and
bar codes. See the Resolving the excessive Resin Printing problems procedure in
Section 2, page 105.)
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 151
Using the Image Color tab (continued)
Step Procedure
5 Return all options to their factory settings by clicking on the Default button.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 152
Using the K Panel Resin tab
Use this tab to adjust the Print All Black with K Panel (options) and the Defined Areas. Use
this tab to control where the resin black (K) panel of a full-color Ribbon is printed.
Resin black text is desirable due to its sharp, saturated color and resin black barcodes
are required to ensure readability when scanned by an infrared barcode reader. (Note:
The Printer driver will automatically print all TrueType black text and TrueType barcodes
only with the resin black (K) panel of the print Ribbon by default.)
If printing black text or barcodes that are not TrueType fonts or black graphics, select one
of the three options listed under Print All Black with K Panel. See the Selecting the Full
Card with the K Panel Resin tab procedure on the next page. (Note: The Printer driver
will print areas of the image where it finds black coloring with the print Ribbon's resin
black (K) panel, as specified by each of the following options.)
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 153
Selecting the Full Card with the K Panel Resin tab
Step Procedure
1 Select the Full Card option to print the resin black (K) panel for all black found
within all areas of the image, as shown below.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 154
Selecting the Defined Area(s) with the K Panel Resin tab
Step Procedure
1 Select the Defined Area(s) option to print the resin black (K) panel for all black
found only in an area or areas defined, as shown below.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 155
Selecting the Undefined Area(s) with the K Panel Resin tab
Step Procedure
1 Select the Undefined Area(s) option to print the resin black (K) panel for all
black found only in the space outside the areas defined, as shown below. (Note:
In the card grid, black indicates the area in which the resin black (K) panel will be
printed.)
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 156
Defining the Area to activate the Card Grid
Step Procedure
1 Select on the appropriate Defined Area (see below) to activate the card grid in the
upper half of the window. (Note: It is through this card grid that up to five areas
can be defined, as shown below.)
When the card grid is first activated, a small black square will appear at its:
default size of .2" x .2" (5mm x 5mm)
default location in the lower left-hand corner (0,0)
(Note: This square represents the first defined area.)
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 157
Measuring the Total Card area
Step Procedure
1 Determine the area of the card to define. (Note: This area is indicated by the
dashed outline, as shown below. The easiest way to determine the size of this
area is to actually print a card and look at it in the same orientation as when it
exits the Printer.)
2 Measure the total area and enter those dimensions into the Dimension boxes.
(Note: The minimum size for an area is .2" x .2" (5mm x 5mm).) See the next
page.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 158
Measuring the Total Card area (continued)
See the previous procedure in this section.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 159
Defining the positioning of the area on the Card
Step Procedure
1 Once the area is sized properly, measure the location where this area is to be
positioned on the card.
a. Measure from the lower left corner of the card up and over to the lower left
corner of where the defined area is to begin.
b. Enter these values into the X and Y boxes, as shown below.
c. Note that the card grid lines are spaced at .2” (5mm) intervals.
* 172355*
Karen Atkins
Access Level-2
ID# 1234478
Y=0.2“
X=1.4“
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 160
Defining the positioning of the area on the Card (continued)
See the previous procedure in this section.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 161
Selecting the Print YMC under the K and Print K Only options
Step Procedure
1 Select the Print YMC Under K option to print all black in the designated areas
with the Yellow (Y), Magenta (M) and Cyan (C) Ribbon panels directly beneath
the resin black (K) panel. (Note: Select this option if printing resin black text or
barcodes onto a colored background to provide a more gradual transition
between the two.)
OR
Select the Print K Only option (a) to print all black in the designated areas only
with the resin black (K) panel or (b) to print resin black onto a white background
to maximize the sharpness of printed text and barcodes.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 162
Selecting the Print YMC under the K and Print K Only options (continued)
See the previous procedure in this section.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 163
Using the Magnetic Encoding tab
Use these options only if the Printer has an optional Magnetic Stripe Encoding Module
installed.
Step Procedure
1 Select the Magnetic Encoding tab to display options for controlling the
Magnetic Stripe encoding process. (Note: The following describes these options
and the Printer's magnetic encoding process.)
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 164
Using the Encoding Mode option
Use the Encoding Mode option to specify which magnetic encoding standard to use.
The DTC500 Series Card Printer can be installed with one of two types of factory-
installed Magnetic Stripe Encoding Modules.
Change the encoding mode and Coercivity setting or modify the ISO standards for tracks
1, 2 and 3, by correctly modifying these Magnetic Encoding options.
Step Procedure
1 Select the ISO Standard Encoding Module with a dual-Coercivity (high or low)
encoding head. (Note: By default, the Printer driver is set to encode according
to ISO standards onto High Coercivity Magnetic Stripes.)
OR
Select the JIS II Standard Encoding Module commonly used in Japan. Select the
JIS II mode to encode only Track 2.
(Note #1: The JIS II option provides encoding compatibility with the JIS C 6220
Type II cards commonly used in Japan. No encoding customization options are
available with the JIS II mode.)
(Note #2: The JIS II Magnetic Head must be installed in the Printer to use any
of the JIS II options in the driver.)
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 165
Using the Encoding Mode option (continued)
See the previous procedure in this section.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 166
Encoding the Mode/Coercivity/Magnetic Track Selection
Use the ISO option for encoding capability for either high- or low-Coercivity cards on tracks
1, 2 and 3.
Step Procedure
1 Select the Coercivity option to select the Magnetic Stripe type that matches the
card type.
High Coercivity = 2500-4000 Oersted (Fargo’s High Coercivity UltraCards
are 2750Oe)
Low Coercivity = 250-600 Oersted (Fargo’s Low Coercivity UltraCards are
300Oe)
2 Select the Magnetic Track Selection option to specify which track is to be
configured through the Magnetic Track options (if the application being used
requires customization of the standard ISO encoding process).
3 Customize these options if the application requires it; even though, the default
ISO Magnetic Track options should be correct for most applications. (Note: All
options must be changed separately for each of the three individual tracks.)
a. Set these options back to the ISO standard settings once they have been
changed by selecting the Default button for each of the separate tracks.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 167
Encoding the Mode/Coercivity/Magnetic Track Selection
See the previous procedure in this section.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 168
Using the Magnetic Track Selection option
Use these options to customize the ISO encoded data format for each of the Magnetic
Stripe's three tracks.
Step Procedure
1 Specify which of the three (3) tracks to customize by selecting one of the three
track options.
After making the required selection, the Magnetic Track options box displays
the current set of customization options for the selected track.
Remember that each track must be customized independently of the other
two tracks.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 169
Reviewing the Enable MLE Support checkbox
Multi-Language Extension (MLE) support in Windows XP can cause text strings to be broken
up into fragments. This fragmentation of the text string prevents magnetic encoding.
Step Procedure
1 Check this box to allow the Driver to process the fragmented text.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 170
Using the Magnetic Track options
Use the Magnetic Track options for these purposes:
Customize the ISO encoded data format for each of the Magnetic Stripe's three tracks.
Customize each track independently of the other two.
Specify which of the three tracks to customize by selecting one of the three track
options.)
(Note #1: After making the required selection, the Magnetic Track options box displays the
current set of customization options for the selected track.)
(Note #2: For most applications, the default settings for these options do not need to be
changed.)
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 171
Using the Bit Density radio buttons
Use this option to customize the Bit Recording Density (Bits per Inch) used to encode the
magnetic data on the currently selected track. The default ISO Standard selections for this
option are as follows:
Step Procedure
1 Select 75 BPI to change the bits per inch to 75 BPI.
OR
Select 128 BPI to change the bits per inch to 128 BPI.
OR
Select 210 BPI to change the bits per inch to 210 BPI.
Using the Character Size radio buttons
Use this option to customize the Character Data Size (Bits per Character) used to encode
the magnetic data on the currently selected track. (Note: This character size includes the
parity bit (if enabled).)
Step Procedure
1 Select 5 Bits to change the bits per character to 5 BPC.
OR
Select 7 BPI to change the bits per character to 7 BPC.
OR
Select 8 BPI to change the bits per character to 8 BPC.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 172
Using the ASCII Offset
Use this option to customize the Character ASCII Offset used to encode the magnetic data
on the currently selected track. (Note: This character-offset value is subtracted from the
ASCII value of each Magnetic Stripe data character prior to encoding on the track.)
Step Procedure
1 Select NULL to change the ASCII Offset to NULL.
OR
Select SPACE to change the ASCII Offset to SPACE.
OR
Select ZERO to change the ASCII Offset to ZERO.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 173
Using the LRC Generation radio buttons
Use this option to customize the LRC Generation Mode (used to encode the magnetic data
on the currently selected track).
Step Procedure
1 Select NO LRC to change the LRC Generation to none.
OR
Select Even Parity to change the LRC Generation to Even Parity.
OR
Select Odd Parity to change the LRC Generation to Odd Parity.
Using the Character Parity radio buttons
Use this option to customize the Character Data Parity (used to encode the magnetic data on
the currently selected track).
Step Procedure
1 Select No Parity to change the Character Parity to none.
OR
Select Even Parity to change the Character Parity to Even Parity.
OR
Select Odd Parity to change the Character Parity to Odd Parity
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 174
Using the Verification option
Use the Verification option, which instructs the Printer to verify that all magnetic data has
been correctly encoded on each card. (Note: with either of these options, the number of
verification retries can be specified. A range of 1 to 5 retries is available.)
Step Procedure
1 Select the Auto Eject 1st Error option, which instructs the Printer to
automatically eject a card containing magnetic data (that cannot be verified).
(Note: This option is helpful since Magnetic Stripe verification can sometimes
require more than a single pass.)
Manual Eject mode: Only the first mistakenly verified card would be
automatically ejected. If a second consecutive card cannot be verified, the
Printer will signal an error and go into a Manual Eject mode.
Auto Eject option: The Auto Eject option is the most direct means of
dealing with mistakenly-verified cards. However, it may be undesirable (if
batch printing) since mistakenly-verified blank cards are ejected into the
same stack as verified printed cards.
OR
Select the Manual Eject Each Error option so the Printer will signal an error on
its LCD display (stating that the magnetic data could not be verified). (Note:
When this occurs, press the Cancel soft key to manually eject the mistakenly
verified card.)
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 175
Reviewing the Shift Data Left
Use the Shift Data Left option, which applies to all tracks when selected.
Step Procedure
1 Select this option to shift the recorded magnetic data to the left-hand side of the
card's Magnetic Stripe. (Note: This is useful in situations that require cards to be
readable with insert type readers.)
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 176
Reviewing the ISO Track Locations
The magnetic Encoding Module encodes onto tracks in accordance with an ISO 7811-2
Magnetic Stripe. For track locations, review the display below.
TRACK1 0.110"
TRACK2 0.110"
TRACK3 0.110"
0.130"
0.140"
0.223" 0.353" 0.493"
Reviewing the Sample String
Sending Data to Track 1: ~1%JULIEANDERSON^1234567890?
Sending Data to Track 2: ~2;1234567890987654321?
Sending Data to Track 3: ~3;1234567890987654321?
Track Start
Sentinel End
Sentinel Field
Separator
Valid Characters Maximum
Number of
Characters
Track 1 % ? ^ ASCII 32-95
(See Reviewing the
ASCII Code and
Character Table on
page 178.)
78
Track 2 ; ? = ASCII 48-63 39
Track 3 ; ? = ASCII 48-63 106
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 177
Sending the Track Information
Magnetic track data is sent in the form of text strings from the application software to the
Printer driver. Specific characters must be added to the magnetic data (to be encoded) in
order for the Printer driver to differentiate between Magnetic Track data and the rest of the
printable objects. (Note: These specify the data and the tracks to encode and mark the
start and the stop of the data string.)
Automatic: In some cases, these specific characters are automatically added to the
string of track data by ID software applications.
Manual: In most cases, the User must manually add these characters to the string of
Magnetic Track data. (Note: If these characters are not added to the track data, the text
intended for the Magnetic Track will appear as printed text on the card.)
To avoid this, track information must be entered as described below.
Step Procedure
1 When entering track data, the "~" (tilde) character is entered first, followed by the
track number (1, 2 or 3) on which the data should encode. This is followed by the
data to be encoded.
Start Sentinel and End Sentinel: The first character of this data string must
be the track's specific Start Sentinel (SS) and the last character must be the
specific End Sentinel (ES). (Note: The characters or data in between the SS
and ES can include all of the valid characters specific to each track.)
Maximum Character Capacity: The number of these characters, however,
is limited by each track's maximum character capacity.
Field Separator: When segmenting track data, the appropriate Field
Separator (FS) must be used. (Note: See the table on the next page, which
displays the SS, ES, FS and the valid characters defined for each track.)
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 178
Reviewing the ASCII Code and Character Table
ASCII Code Character ASCII Code Character ASCII Code Character
32 space 56 8 80 P
33 ! 57 9 81 Q
34 " 58 : 82 R
35 # 59 ; 83 S
36 $ 60 < 84 T
37 % 61 = 85 U
38 & 62 > 86 V
39 ' 63 ? 87 W
40 ( 64 @ 88 X
41 ) 65 A 89 Y
42 * 66 B 90 Z
43 + 67 C 91 [
44 ' 68 D 92 \
45 - 69 E 93 ]
46 . 70 F 94 ^
47 / 71 G 95 _
48 0 72 H
49 1 73 I
50 2 74 J
51 3 75 K
52 4 76 L
53 5 77 M
54 6 78 N
55 7 79 O
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 179
Using the Overlay/Print Area tab
Use this option to control how the Overlay (O) Panel and/or the print area will appear on a
card. (Note: This option is helpful if, to omit the overlay or printing around a card's smart
chip or Magnetic Stripe. By default, this option is set to print and overlay the entire card.)
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 180
Using the Overlay/Print Area dropdown menu
Step Procedure
1 Select the Full Card option for the Printer to overlay and/or print the entire card.
OR
Select the Defined Area(s) option for the Printer to overlay and/or print only in
the selected and defined area or areas.
OR
Select the Undefined Area(s) option for the Printer to overlay and/or print only in
the space outside the selected and defined area.
OR
Select the Omit Smart Chip Area option for the Printer to overlay and/or print
only in the space outside the standard location of a smart chip.
OR
Select the Omit Mag Stripe Area option for the Printer to overlay and/or print
only in the space outside the standard location of an ISO Magnetic Stripe.
OR
Select the Omit Signature Area option for the Printer to overlay and/or print only
in the space outside the standard location of a signature panel.
(Note: In the card grid, black indicates the area in which the overlay and/or
printing will be applied.)
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 181
Using the Overlay/Print Area
Use these Overlay/Print Area options to control both the print and overlay together or
control each individually.
Step Procedure
1 Select For Print and Overlay for the defined area to apply to both the printing and
overlay process.
OR
Select For Overlay Only for the defined area to apply only to the overlay process.
(Note: In this mode, printing will still be allowed over the entire card and only the
overlay will be affected.)
OR
Select For Print Only (No Overlay) for the defined area to apply only to the print
process. (Note: In this mode, the overlay is completely disabled; so it will not be
applied.)
Caution: An overlay or an overlaminate must protect Dye-Sublimation
printing or it will quickly begin to wear or fade.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 182
Using the Overlay/Print Area (continued)
Step Procedure
1 Select the Defined Area(s) option to activate the card grid in the upper half of
the window. (Note: This allows defined areas to be created. It is through this
card grid that up to five areas can be defined.)
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 183
Using the Overlay/Print Area (continued)
Step Procedure
2 When the card grid is first activated, a small black square will appear at its
default size of .2" x .2"/5mm x 5mm and at its default location in the lower left-
hand corner (0,0). (Note: This square represents the first defined area.)
Determine the area size by actually printing a card and looking at it in the
same orientation as when it exits the Printer.
3 Measure the total size of the desired area and enter those dimensions into the
Dimension boxes. (Note: The minimum size an area is .2" x .2"/5mm x 5mm.)
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 184
Using the Overlay/Print Area (continued)
See the previous procedure in this section.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 185
Using the Overlay/Print Area (continued)
Step Procedure
4 Follow this procedure once the area is sized properly.
a. Measure the location this desired area to be positioned on the card.
b. Measure from the lower left corner of the card (up and over) to the lower left
corner (for the defined area to begin).
c. Enter these values into the X and Y boxes. (Note: The card grid lines are
spaced at .2 inch/5mm intervals.)
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 186
Using the Overlay/Print Area (continued)
Step Procedure
5 a. Print the card design.
b. Observe how the image is oriented on the card as it ejects from the Printer.
(Note: The location of a defined area is based on the card orientation as it
exits the Printer.)
c. Measure the defined area location based on the printed card. (Note: If
selecting the Rotate Front 180 Degrees option, the image will appear upside
down as it exits the Printer.)
d. Position the defined area opposite to the measurement of the onscreen card
design (which will appear right side up).
6 Use the Defined Area arrows to navigate back and forth from area to area.
(Note: The active area will always be highlighted with a dotted outline.)
a. Define another area by clicking on the Defined Area UP arrow.
Another .2" x .2"/5mm x 5mm area will appear in the lower left-hand
corner. (Note: This is the location in which all newly defined areas will
first appear.)
Up to 5 areas can be defined. However, additional areas cannot be
added until the most recently created area has been moved or sized.
(Note: For this reason, size and position each area as it is created.)
b. Define areas for both the front and back sides (as needed) if printing onto
both sides of the card.
c. Delete an area by using the Defined Area arrows to select the area and click
on the Delete button. (Note: If all areas are deleted, the Overlay/Print Area
options will automatically be deselected.)
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 187
Using Security Options (Visual Security Solutions)
The Visual Security Solutions dropdown menu list will be used to enable and select which
type of visual security will be used. The Visual Security dropdown list will be selectable only
on the Front side (see below). Visual Security is not an option for the back side.
The following actions will occur when one of the Visual Security locations is selected.
The Overlay/Print Area will be disabled.
SmartShield will be disabled.
The Foil Options become selectable.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 188
Selecting Orientation - Landscape under Card tab
Step Procedure
1 Select the Landscape radio button (below) under Orientation under the Card
Size tab to use the Visual Security Solutions (A to D), as shown in this window.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 189
Selecting the Visual Security Solutions dropdown menu (A to D)
Step Procedure
1 Click on the Visual Security Solutions dropdown menu (below) under the
Landscape - Orientation (see above) to use the options shown in this display.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 190
Selecting Orientation - Portfolio under Card tab
Step Procedure
1 Select the Portrait radio button (below) under Orientation under the Card Size
tab to use the Visual Security Solutions (E to H), as shown in this window.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 191
Selecting the Visual Security Solutions dropdown menu (E to H)
Step Procedure
1 Click on the Visual Security Solutions dropdown menu under the Portrait -
Orientation (see above) to use the options shown below.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 192
Selecting the VeriMark radio button
Step Procedure
1 Click on either the VeriMark or HoloMark radio button, as shown below. The foil
options are used to control the size of the exclusion area. (Note: When
VeriMark is selected a rectangle-sized area is excluded, HoloMark uses a
square sized area.)
2 Click on the VeriMark radio button (below) for the rectangle-sized area.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 193
Selecting the HoloMark radio button
Step Procedure
1 Click on the HoloMark radio button (below) for the squared-area size.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 194
Reviewing the Custom VeriMark Card
The custom VeriMark image is stamped on blank, standard-sized cards. You can select one
of eight positions (A to H), as shown in the Portrait and Landscape samples below.
Sample 1: VeriMark Card (Landscape - Orientation) - 4 positions (below)
A
D
B
C
Sample 2: VeriMark Card (Portrait - Orientation) - 4 positions (below)
FE
G H
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 195
Reviewing the Custom HoloMark Card
The custom HoloMark image is stamped on blank, standard-sized cards. You can select one
of eight positions (A to H), as shown in the Portrait and Landscape samples below.
Sample 1: HoloMark Card (Landscape - Orientation) - 4 positions (below)
D
C
B
A
Sample 2: HoloMark Card (Portrait - Orientation) - 4 positions (below)
FE
G H
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 196
Using SmartShield Area dropdown menu
Use the SmartShield Area options, which apply only if using the Printer's optional
SmartGuard Security Feature and the SmartShield option is enabled.
Step Procedure
1 Select the Apply SmartShield option to print the custom SmartShield Security
Image (a) if using the Printer's optional SmartGuard Security Feature and (b) if
the SmartShield option is enabled. (Note: Use the Front and Back options at
the top of this tab to designate the side or sides of the card to print the
SmartShield image.)
OR
Select No SmartShield (a) if not using the SmartShield option or (b) if not
printing the SmartShield image (even if it is encoded on the SmartGuard Access
Card).
(Note #1: This is a convenient way of turning the SmartShield Security Feature
ON or OFF.)
(Note #2: It is not possible to apply an overlay and a SmartShield image to the
same side of a card.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 197
Using the Card tab
Use this option to control specific Printer functions.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 198
Selecting the Card Size
Select either the CR-80 or CR-79 for the appropriate card size option from the two (2)
standard card sizes.
When designing a card format, always set the card size or page size within the card
design program to the exact Print Length and Width dimensions listed in the Printer
driver.
The dimensions of the total print area for each card size will appear in the Print Width and
Print Length boxes.
Step Procedure
1 Select CR-80 to print onto standard "credit card" sized cards.
OR
Select CR-79 to print onto slightly smaller CR-79 sized cards (3.303” L x
2.051W/83.9mm L x 52.1mm W).
The CR-79 card adhesive-backed card is used in applications where they are
printed and applied to thicker proximity cards.
Make a simple card size adjustment to the Printer's Card Thickness
Adjustment Lever if printing with CR-79 sized cards to decrease the accepted
card thickness.
2 Select either the inches or mm radio button (as needed).
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 199
Selecting the Card Size (continued)
See the previous procedure in this section.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 200
Using the Card Hopper Selection (DTC515/DTC525 only) option
This option only applies if using the DTC515 or DTC525 Card Printer models that provide a
dual-stack, 200-card capacity Card Input Hopper. (Note: The Printer driver always overrides
the LCD-based hopper selection. For example, the Printer will print from Hopper 2 even if
Hopper 1 (H-1) is selected on the LCD. This is because the print job was sent with Hopper 2
(selected from the Printer driver).)
Steps Procedure
1 Select First Available for these purposes:
To print from the hopper currently selected as indicated on the Printer's LCD.
To automatically switch (via the Printer) to the other hopper once the current
hopper runs out of cards. (Note: In most cases, this option is used when
both hoppers are loaded with the same type of cards such as in higher
volume batch printing applications.)
To manually designate the hopper just prior to each specific print job by
pressing the H-1 or H-2 softkey buttons.
OR
Select Hopper 1 to print only from Hopper 1.
Select this option and the hopper will not automatically switch to the other
hopper when running out of cards in Hopper 1.
Use this option when two different types of cards are loaded separately into
each hopper in order to print onto only one of those specific cards (e.g., Mag
stripe cards in Hopper 1 versus non stripe cards in Hopper 2).
OR
Select Hopper 2 to print only from Hopper 2 in this same fashion.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 201
Using the Card Hopper Selection (DTC515/DTC525 only) option (cont.)
See the previous procedure in this section.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 202
Using the Card Hopper Selection (DTC515/DTC525 only) option (continued)
See the previous procedure in this section.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 203
Reviewing the Orientation
Select either the Portrait or Landscape radio buttons for Orientation. (Note: An icon
illustrating a printed card helps represent the difference between the two.)
Step Procedure
1 Select Portrait to cause the card to print in a vertical orientation.
OR
Select Landscape to cause the card to print in a horizontal orientation, as shown
on the below.
Specifying the Copies
Specifies the number of copies to be printed, as shown above.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 204
Using the Test Print button
Use this button to send a Self-Test print to the Printer.
Ribbon Requirement: A Full-Color YMCKO print Ribbon is required for a
DTC510/DTC515 or YMCKOK print Ribbon is required for a DTC520/DTC525.
Test Print Procedure: This test print procedure can be helpful in ensuring (a) that the
computer is effectively communicating with the Printer and (b) that the Printer is
functioning properly.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 205
Clicking on the About button
Click this About button to open a dialog containing the copyright and version information
about this Printer driver software.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 206
Using the Image Position button
Use the Image Position controls to adjust the position of the overall print area to be
precisely centered on a card.
Step Procedure
1 Adjust the Image Position values by clicking on the Vertical and Horizontal
adjustment arrows, as shown below.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 207
Using the Image Position button (continued)
When adjusting these values, keep in mind that cards always remain in the same position as
they travel through the Printer, regardless of image orientation.
To illustrate this, the card illustration shown in the Image Position box will flip and rotate
according to whether you have selected the Portrait or Landscape radio buttons. However,
the outline around the illustration will always remain in the same landscape orientation.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 208
Using the Image Position button (continued)
The following diagram represents how the printed image will move in relation to the fixed
card position as positive and negative image placement values are entered.
Use the Vertical adjustment to move the image more toward the rear of the Printer (if a
positive number is entered) and more toward the front of the Printer (if a negative number
is entered).
Use the Horizontal adjustment to move the image more toward the card output side of
the Printer (if a positive number is entered) and more toward the card input side of the
Printer (if a negative number is entered).
(Note: The maximum value for the Vertical and Horizontal adjustments is ±100 pixels (10
pixels =.0333"/.847mm).)
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 209
Using the Lamination tab (only with Card Lamination
Module)
Use this option to control specific Printer functions. The Lamination Tab appears only if the
Printer is equipped with the Card Lamination Module. These options allow you to control the
Printer's lamination process.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 210
Selecting the Lamination Position
Step Procedure
1 The Lamination Position control allows you to adjust the horizontal position of
the PolyGuard overlaminate. This control functions in the exact same fashion
as the Image Position controls, except only the horizontal position of the
overlaminate requires adjustment.
To adjust the lamination position, click on the Horizontal adjustment
arrows.
To move the overlaminate more toward the Card output side of the Printer,
enter a positive number.
To move the overlaminate more toward the card input side of the Printer,
enter a negative number. (Note: The adjustment arrows point in the
direction the patch will move on the card. The maximum value for the
Horizontal adjustment is ±100 pixels (10 pixels = about .03"/.8mm).)
To adjust the Vertical placement of the PolyGuard overlaminate, see the
Loading the Overlaminate procedure in Section 3, page 115.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 211
Selecting the Lamination Side
Step Procedure
1 a. Select the No Lamination option if you do not want to use the Printer's
built-in laminator.
b. Select Laminate Front Side, Laminate Back Side or Laminate Both Sides to
specify the side(s) of the card to laminate.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 212
Selecting the Lamination Type
Select one of the Lamination Type options, according to which type of lamination media is
currently installed. Two types of overlaminates are supported by the driver: Film Lamination
and PolyGuard lamination. Custom versions of each type are also available.
Step Procedure
1A Select the Film Lamination option if the Thermal Transfer Film Overlaminate
type is installed in the Lamination Module.
The Film Lamination may be applied with or without the application of an
additional overlay from a paneled, full-color print Ribbon.
The Overlay (O) Panel provides additional Ultra-Violet (UV) light
protection and additional abrasion resistance not found when using film
laminations alone; however, it requires use of a print Ribbon with an
Overlay (O) Panel.
If using Film lamination, the additional protection of the print Ribbon's
overlay panel is recommended.
If the Film Lamination option is selected, the film lamination is applied to
the printed card, then the card is ejected. (Note: This is the fastest way
to apply the film lamination, yet it provides the lowest film durability.)
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 213
Selecting the Lamination Type
Step Procedure
1B Select the Overlay then Film Lamination option when using a Ribbon which
provides a clear overlay panel. The Ribbon types which do not provide an
overlay panel or support overlay printing are the resin-only Ribbons and the
Full-Color YMC, YMCK and YMCKK Ribbons.
OR
Select the 0.6 PolyGuard Lamination option or 1.0 PolyGuard Lamination
option for either patch thickness. (Note: These both offer equivalent
protection but require different heat settings and lamination speeds.
Select the appropriate option according to the thickness of the PolyGuard
material you are using.)
Select the PolyGuard Alternating Patch option only if using PolyGuard
material that has alternating patch configurations on the same roll (e.g.,
full patch on the front of the card and half patch on the back).
Caution: with any of these PolyGuard options, do not apply the
Ribbon overlay (O) when laminating with PolyGuard.
OR
Select the PolyGuard Alternating Patch option only if using PolyGuard
material that has alternating patch configurations on the same roll (e.g., full
patch on the front of the card and half patch on the back).
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 214
Adjusting the Transfer Dwell Time and Transfer Temperature
Step Procedure
1 Adjust the Transfer Dwell Time and the Transfer Temperature to control the
Lamination Dwell Time or through-put speed of a card in seconds/inch and the
Lamination Temperature.
Selecting the Sensors button and Defaults button
Step Procedure
1 Select the Sensors button to bring up a separate dialog to calibrate the
Lamination Sensor. See the next page.
2 Adjust the Default settings as needed when using other types of cards. (Note:
The Default settings for the Lamination Dwell Time and Temperature are
preset for factory-recommended card stocks and overlaminate types.)
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 215
Calibrating the Card Lamination Module’s Lamination Sensor
Step Procedure
1 Select the Lamination Tab's Sensors button to display options for calibrating
the Card Lamination Module’s Lamination Sensor. The Lamination Sensor is
what detects the start of each PolyGuard patch throughout the roll. This
Sensor may occasionally need to be recalibrated.
If the lamination module seems to skip PolyGuard patches or wind the
PolyGuard roll until the lamination module's LED flashes, recalibrate the
Lamination Sensor according to the instructions given the in the Calibration
window.
Be sure the Printer is powered ON and that the lamination module's Top
Cover and Lamination Station are closed when calibrating. (Note: This
Sensor is not used if applying Thermal Transfer Film overlaminate.)
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 216
Section 5: Cleaning
This Section deals with the Printer’s internal and external maintenance in regards to the
unit's cleaning and general upkeep. (Note: The Printer should be cleaned on a regular basis
to insure that the Printer consistently produces high quality output.)
Danger: Be sure to disconnect the Printer's power cord whenever performing any
type of maintenance procedure unless otherwise directed.
Safety Messages (review carefully)
Symbol Critical Instructions for Safety purposes
Danger:
Failure to follow these installation guidelines can result in death or
serious injury.
Information that raises potential safety issues is indicated by a warning
symbol (as shown to the below).
To prevent personal injury, refer to the following safety messages
before performing an operation preceded by this symbol.
To prevent personal injury, always remove the power cord prior to
performing repair procedures, unless otherwise specified.
To prevent personal injury, make sure only qualified personnel
perform these procedures.
Caution:
This device is electrostatically sensitive. It can be damaged if
exposed to static electricity discharges.
Information that raises potential electrostatic safety issues is indicated by a
warning symbol (as shown to the below).
To prevent equipment or media damage, refer to the following safety
messages before performing an operation preceded by this symbol.
To prevent equipment or media damage, observe all established
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) procedures while handling cables in or
near the Circuit Board and Printhead Assemblies.
To prevent equipment or media damage, always wear an appropriate
personal grounding device (e.g., a high quality wrist strap grounded to
avoid potential damage).
To prevent equipment or media damage, always remove the Ribbon
and Cards from the Printer before making any repairs, unless otherwise
specified.
To prevent equipment or media damage, take jewelry off of fingers
and hands, as well as thoroughly clean hands to remove oil and debris
before working on the Printer.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 217
Cleaning the Printhead (850102)
Caution: Perform this procedure during every Ribbon change or after every 1,000
prints to maintain consistent print quality. Perform this procedure for streaks on the card
where the color was not transferred correctly.
Steps
Procedure
1 Open the Printer's Top Cover and Print Station.
2 Using a Printhead Cleaning Pen from the Printer Cleaning Kit, firmly wipe back
and forth across the surface of the Printhead.
3 Once the Printhead is completely dry, close the Printer.
4 If a streak persists, contact Technical Support.
Printhead
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 218
Replacing the Card Cleaning Tape
Caution: Replace the Card Cleaning Tape approximately every 2,000 to 3,000
prints, depending on the cleanliness of the card stock or the environment in which the
Printer is located.
Steps
Procedure
1 Open the Printer's Top Cover.
2 Pull the Cleaning Cartridge out of the Printer.
3 Open the Cleaning Cartridge by pressing on the release tab of the clear
Cleaning Cartridge Cover and pulling the cover up.
4 Pull up on the used cleaning tape and lift it and the two Tape Rollers out of the
Cartridge. (Note: The Cleaning Roller can stay within the Cartridge.)
5 Insert the two Tape Rollers into the new Cleaning Tape loop.
6 Place the Tape Rollers and the new tape back into the cartridge by (a) placing
the Roller (closest to the cartridge's handle) and (b) pressing the second Roller
into place.
Caution: Be sure to orient the new tape loop so that it extends over
the Cleaning Roller once it is installed. See the next page.
7 a. Set the clear Cleaning Cartridge Cover back into place.
Caution: Be sure the tabs on the cover are seated properly into the
slots on the cartridge as shown below.
b. When in place, press down on the top of the cover until it snaps shut.
8 Pull on the tape loop's tab to remove the backing from the tape.
9 Insert the Cleaning Cartridge back into the Printer.
Caution: Be sure to push down on the cartridge until it clicks into
place. If the cartridge is not inserted properly, the Printer will not feed cards.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 219
Replacing the Card Cleaning Tape (continued)
See the previous procedure in this section.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 220
Cleaning the Platen and Card Feed Rollers
Caution: Clean the black, rubber Platen Roller and all of the gray (or black), rubber
Card Feed Rollers within the Printer approximately every 2,000-3,000 prints, depending on
the cleanliness of the card stock or the environment in which the Printer is located. Clean if
the Rollers appear dirty to prevent card jams and maintain the best print quality.
with the Printer power ON, use the following steps to clean the Rollers:
Steps
Procedure
1 Open the Printer's Top Cover and Print Station.
Caution: Do not remove blank cards, print Ribbon or the Card
Cleaning Cartridge from the Printer for this procedure.
2 Get a Cleaning Card from the Printer Cleaning Kit and remove its adhesive
backing paper.
3 with the Card Hopper Door closed, insert the Cleaning Card into the Exception
Card Slot until the card stops.
Caution: Be sure to insert the card so that the longest end of the card
is inserted first with the sticky side facing down.
4 Press the Printer's FORWARD softkey button several times to feed the
Cleaning Card all the way through the Printer.
5 a. Repeat this cleaning procedure if additional cleaning is necessary.
b. Once the Rollers are clean, close the Print Station and Top Cover.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 221
Cleaning the Platen and Card Feed Rollers (continued)
See the previous procedure in this section.
Platen Roller
Card Feed Rollers
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 222
Cleaning the Platen and Card Feed Rollers (continued)
See the previous procedure in this section.
Card Feed Rollers
Platen Roller
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 223
Cleaning the Platen
The Printer's Platen Roller should be cleaned approximately every 250 prints. (Note: This
helps prevent jams and maintain the best print quality. Perform this procedure if the roller is
visibly dirty.)
Steps
Procedure
1 Leave the power ON and open the printer's Top Cover and Print Station.
2 Remove the print ribbon.
3 Locate the Platen Roller.
4 Use a Cleaning Pad from the Printer Cleaning Kit to wipe the roller clean. Press
the FORWARD and BACK buttons to move the roller back and forth while
cleaning.
5 After the roller is clean and completely dry, replace the printing supplies and
close the printer.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 224
Cleaning the Printer's Exterior
The Printer has a durable casing that should retain its luster and appearance for many years.
Clean it only with a Cleaning Pad from the Printer Cleaning Kit. (Note: See the next section
for a photo of Printer’s exterior.)
Caution: Do not use cleaning solvents of any kind or spray the cabinet with a
cleaner!
Cleaning the Printer's Interior
Caution: The Printer, dust and other particles can accumulate inside the Printer.
These particles are attracted to the print Ribbon or blank card by static produced during
printing and can contaminate the printed card causing spots or speckles to appear.
Periodically, use the following procedure to remove dust and other contaminants:
Steps
Procedure
1 Open the Printer's Top Cover and Print Station. See the next page.
2 Remove the print Ribbon from the Printer.
3 Use a Cleaning Pad from the Printer Cleaning Kit to wipe out all visible areas
inside the Printer. Remove any debris within its interior.
Caution: Be extremely careful not to let any alcohol drip inside the
Printer.
4 Re-install the printing supplies and close the Printer. See the next page.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 225
Cleaning the Printer's Interior (continued)
This is a display for the Print Station (opened).
This is a display for the Print Station (closed).
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 226
Cleaning the Magnetic Encoder
Step Procedure
1 Open the Top Cover and the Printhead Arm.
2 a. Remove the Ribbon. (Note: Leave the Cleaning Roller installed.)
b. Turn the Printer on.
3 Rotate the Flipper Table clockwise to a 45 degree angle. (Note: The Table
will tilt and provide access to the Magnetic Encoder opening.)
4 Open the Cleaning Card (082133), which is sold separately and is not
included in the cleaning kit. (Note: You will need to work quickly as the
alcohol will dry when removed from the envelope.)
5 Insert the card onto the Flipper Table. See below.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 227
Cleaning the Magnetic Encoder (cont.)
Step Procedure
6 Feed the Cleaning Card into the Magnetic Encoder Module by pressing the
BACK button on the LCD display four (4) times. (Note: The card does not
go all the way through the Flipper Table.) See below.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 228
Cleaning the Magnetic Encoder (cont.)
Step Procedure
7 Hold the end of the Cleaning Card securely with your thumb and index finger
while you press the BACK button on the LCD display four (4) more times.
(Note: This allows the Roller to spin against the Cleaning Card and fully
clean the Roller.)
See below.
8 Remove the Cleaning Card by pressing the FORWARD button on the LCD
display to eject this card from the Printer.
9 Process is now complete. (Note: This magnetic cleaning process should be
done every time another cleaning is performed, which is roughly every 3,000
cards, or whenever you experience Magnetic Encoding problems.)
10 Be aware that the card can be used only once as it will dry out quickly.
(Note: If the card dries out before you clean the Roller, a new card must be
used.)
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 229
Section 6: Packing the DTC500 Card Printer
The purpose of this section to provide the User with a specific packing procedure for the
DTC500 Series Card Printer.
Follow this instruction to pack the card Printer for transport.
Step Procedure
1 a. Clean the inside of the Printer with deionized air.
b. Wipe it down with a lint-free cloth.
2 Clean the Printhead with a Printhead pen.
3 Pack the Printer in the original carton and packing materials.
4 Be sure to enclose any necessary paperwork, test cards, etc.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 230
Section 7: Board Level Diagnostics
The purpose of this section to provide the User with specific Board Level Diagnostic
procedures for Board Errors and Sensor Testing for the DTC500 card Printer.
Board Errors
Resolving the EE Memory Error
Symptom: An error has occurred in the permanent circuit memory.
Step Procedure
1 Reboot the Printer.
2 If the problem persists, the Main Board will need to be replaced. Contact
Technical Support.
3 As an alternative to replacing the Main Print Board, the chip U16 (080239) can
be replaced. (Note: Fargo recommends that only a qualified electronics
technician perform this procedure.)
Resolving the EE Checksum Error
Symptom: An error has occurred in the permanent circuit memory.
Step Procedure
1 Reboot the Printer.
2 If the problem persists, the Main Board will need to be replaced. Contact
Technical Support.
3 As an alternative to replacing the Main Print Board, the chip U16 (080239) can
be replaced. (Note: Fargo recommends that only a qualified electronics
technician perform this procedure.)
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 231
Resolving the DRAM Memory Error
Symptom: An error has occurred in the removable Memory Module (SIMM).
Step Procedure
1 Reboot the Printer.
2 If the problem persists, remove the rear cover and ensure that the SIMM
(080229) is seated properly.
3 If the Memory Module is not seated properly, remove the memory simm and
reinstall.
4 If the installation appears correct and the error persists, the SIMM (080229) on
the Main Print Board will need to be replaced.
Resolving the RAM Memory Error
Symptom: An error has occurred in the permanent circuit memory.
Step Procedure
1 Reboot the Printer.
2 If the problem persists, the Main Board will need to be replaced. Contact
Technical Support.
3 As an alternative to replacing the Main Print Board, the chip U17 (080229) can
be replaced. (Note: Fargo recommends that only a qualified electronics
technician perform this procedure.)
Resolving the FPGA Error
Symptom: An unexpected hardware error has occurred.
Step Procedure
1 Reboot the Printer.
2 If the problem persists, the Main Board will need to be replaced. Contact
Technical Support.
3 As an alternative to replacing the Main Print Board, the chip U2 (080066) can be
replaced. (Note: Fargo recommends that only a qualified electronics technician
perform this procedure.)
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 232
Sensor Testing
Step Procedure
1 Check the voltage to determine if a Sensor is working.
2 a. Test the voltage of each Sensor using ground (GRD = Chassis) to the correct
pin on each connector. See the Sensor Location and Voltages table on the
next page).
b. Block a slot Sensor with a card.
c. Cover a reflective Sensor with a card.
3 a. Troubleshoot the Ribbon Sensor by using the RibbonTraq marks on the
Ribbon and Film to cover the Ribbon and Film Sensors. (Note: The numbers
indicate the location on J16, as shown in the Sensor Location and
Voltages table on the next page).
b. Open the upper module to find the Ribbon Sensor orientation. (Note: The
numbers indicate the location on J16, as shown in the Sensor Location and
Voltages table on the next page.)
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 233
Reviewing the Sensor Location and Voltages
Sensor Location Pin Low Range VDC High Range VDC
Card Sensor
(near Cleaning
Cart)
J15 4 Unblocked .17 - .9 Blocked 3.0 – 3.3
Cover Open
Sensor (plastic
top)
J4 16 Unblocked .17 - .9 Blocked 3.0 – 3.3
Encoding TOF
Platen Home J29 4 Unblocked .17 - .9 Blocked 3.0 – 3.3
Flipper Table
Card Sensor J15 8 Unblocked .17 - .9 Blocked 3.0 – 3.3
Flipper Table
Sensor J7 4 Covered .9 Uncovered 3.0 - 3.3
Hopper Lift
Sensor J4 12 Unblocked .17 - .9 Blocked 3.0 – 3.3
Dual Hopper
Position J32 4 Unblocked .17 - .9 Blocked 3.0 – 3.3
Printhead lift
Sensor J6 8 Unblocked .17 - .9 Blocked 3.0 – 3.3
Magnetic Card
Sensor J7 8 Covered .9 Uncovered 3.0 - 3.3
Bypass
Feed/Hopper
Card Sensor
J4 4 Covered .9 Uncovered 3.0 - 3.3
Hopper Door
Sensor (not used) J4 8 Unblocked .17 - .9 Blocked 3.0 – 3.3
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 234
Reviewing the Sensor Location and Voltages (continued)
Sensor Location Pin Low Range VDC High Range VDC
Print Station
Open Sensor J6 4 Unblocked .17 - .9 Blocked 3.0 – 3.3
Print TOF Sensor J31 4 Unblocked .17 - .9 Blocked 3.0 – 3.3
Ribbon Encoder J6 12 Unblocked .17 - .9 Blocked 3.0 – 3.3
Ribbon Sensor
(5) J16 3 Covered 0.9 Uncovered 3.5 – 5.0
Ribbon Sensor
(4) J16 5 Covered 0.9 Uncovered 3.5 – 5.0
Ribbon Sensor
(3) J16 11 Covered 0.9 Uncovered 3.5 – 5.0
Ribbon Sensor
(2) J16 7 Covered 0.9 Uncovered 3.5 – 5.0
Ribbon Sensor
(1) J16 9 Covered 0.9 Uncovered 3.5 – 5.0
Reviewing the Sensor Layout on Ribbon Sensor array
(5) (4) (3) (2) (1)
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 235
Section 8: LCD On-Line Menu Navigation
The purpose of this section to provide the User with specific procedures for LCD On-Line
Menu Navigation, Test Image Printing and Printer Setup for the DTC500 card Printer.
Entering the LCD Menu and selecting an Option
The MENU option is above the center softkey button, as shown below. This allows access to
several test, setup and reporting functions. The Selecting from the Menu Option Tree
Structure in Section 9, page 236, shows the available menu options. A description of each
option and its function is included on the pages following the on-line menu.
Step Procedure
1 Press the MENU button to bring up the Select Function screen appears, as
shown here.
Use the scroll buttons to move up or down through the menu options, as shown
below. (Note: The brackets appear on either side of the active Menu option.)
Press the button below Select to choose an option. Choose from these five
categories: Print Test Image, Setup Printer, Show error count, Show card
count and System Upgrade.
MENU
Ready
DTC5XX
MENU
H-1 H-2
SELECT FUNCTION
SELECT
HELP
EXIT
[Print Test Image]
Setup Printer
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 236
Using the Softkey and Scroll buttons
Step Procedure
1 The Printer has three Softkey buttons that appear below the LCD display. Their
current function is indicated by the words appearing above them. This function
will change according to the Printer's current mode of operation.
Press the corresponding softkey button under the choice you wish to select.
(Note: If no word appears above a particular button, this indicates it has no
function in that particular mode of operation.)
2 The Printer has another type of button on its control pad called Scroll buttons.
These buttons are located just to the right of the LCD display.
Use these buttons to scroll through the help text, to navigate through the
Printer's menu and to adjust certain Printer setting. (Note: The Printer will
indicate when the scroll buttons are active by displaying on the right-hand
side of the LCD display. If scrolling through a list, this symbol will change to
if you have reached the bottom of the list or if you have reached the top.)
Accessing the Menu Option Structure Tree
When the Printer is powered on and sitting idle, a MENU option appears above the center
softkey button.
Use this menu option to access several test, setup and reporting functions.
Refer to the Menu Option Structure Tree for all available menu options, on the next page.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 237
Selecting from the Menu Option Structure Tree
MENU Input: Single / Dual
Card Sensor: On / Off
Exception Feed: On / Off
Mag: None / Installed
Smart: None / Installed
Prox: None / Installed
Position: CR-80
Magnetic TOF
Current Value X
-99 min +99 max
Current Value X
-99 min +99 max
Current Value X
-25 min +25 max
Current Value X
+2400 min +3600 max
Current Value X
-99 min +99 max
19200
9600
Level
Encoder Angle
Current Value X
-99 min +99 max
Current Value X
-10 min +10 max
PRINT RIBBON
Type: XX
Prints Remaining:
Not Available
Part Number: XX
Lot Number:
Not Available
SELECT FUNCTION
Print Test Image
Setup Printer
Report Supplies
Show Error Count
Show Card Count
System Upgrade
Print TOF
Print EOF
Ribbon Tension
Head Resistance
Image Darkness
Encoder Settings
Hopper Settings
BAUD Rate Settings
Flipper Offset
CHANGE PARAMETER
Gray/Align YMC/K
Color/Resin YMCK
Standard Resin
Magnetic Test
Card Count
SELECT TEST IMAGE
SUPPLIES REPORT
Print Ribbon
EXCEPTION LOG
Type of Error
Occurrences: XX
Example:
Wrong Print Ribbon
Occurrences: 2
Error Log End
CARD STATISTICS
CC: XX PC: XX
SYSTEM UPGRADE
Are you sure you
want to continue?
Yes NO
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 238
Using the LCD Menu
Step Procedure
1 a. To enter the Printer's LCD menu, press the center button labeled MENU.
(Note: The Select Function screen will appear.)
b. Use the scroll buttons to scroll up or down the list of menu options. (Note:
Brackets will appear on either side of the active menu option.)
c. Press the SELECT button to enter or select the desired option.
Printing the Self-test
Use this option to print a variety of preset test images that can be helpful in ensuring your
Printer is functioning properly.
Once the print Ribbon and cards are installed, a self-test should be performed to check
for proper operation of the Printer.
The standard self-test function requires only that a full-color print Ribbon and at least one
card be installed. (Note: The Printer will begin printing this image as soon as the image
has finished processing. Generally, processing only takes about 5 to 10 seconds.)
Step Procedure
1 When the Printer is powered ON and is sitting idle, its READY screen will display
on the LCD.
Press the MENU button to enter the MAIN MENU screen.
2 Press the SELECT button to enter the PRINT TEST IMAGE menu.
3 Use the scroll buttons to scroll to the type of self-test you would like the Printer to
perform.
Note the name of each self-test indicates the Ribbon panels required in order
for the self-test to print.
For example, the Color/Resin YMCK self-test can be printed with either a
YMCKO or YMCKOK full-color print Ribbon.
Press the SELECT button to begin printing. The self-test print will begin as soon
as the test image is processed.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 239
Reviewing the Gray/Align YMC (DTC510/515) and Gray/Align YMC/K
(DTC520/525) Self-Test
Reviewing the Color/Resin YMCK Self-Test
Step Procedure
1 Use this card to determine Image Placement and confirm that (a) the image colors
are properly reproduced and (b) the Resin Panel is printing properly. (Note: The
Image consists of twelve spot colors, YMC and RGB, as well as gray density bars
and thin resin lines.)
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 240
Reviewing the Card Count YMC Self-Test
Step Procedure
1 Use this card to view counts for Card Count (CC) and Pass Count (PC).
The Card Count is the total number of cards the Printer has produced. Pass
Count is the total number of print passes made by the Printhead. (Note: A
pass is measured each time a single Ribbon panel is printed or passes
beneath the Printhead.)
Reviewing the Standard Resin Self-Test
Step Procedure
1 Print this card with any resin Ribbon. However, it will work best with a standard
resin black Ribbon.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 241
Using the Magnetic Test option (only with Magnetic Encoding
Module)
Use this option only if Magnetic Encoding Module is installed in your Printer.
Step Procedure
1 Select this option to test the module. (Note: This test will not print on a card, but
will simply feed, encode and eject a blank card.)
Be sure to have Magnetic Stripe cards installed in your Printer when running this
test.
Setting up the Printer
In most cases, these settings should only be modified by qualified service personnel.
If adjustment is necessary, refer to the Printer's Technical Service and Maintenance
Manual (available upon request) for detailed instructions or call for technical assistance.
If you would like to make small adjustments to Print TOF/EOF (offset) or Image
Darkness, first try making these changes through the Printer driver's Image Position and
Image Color controls prior to changing the internal Printer settings.
Caution #1: These settings are optimized at the factory and will rarely need to be
changed.
Caution #2: Do not alter these settings unless it is absolutely necessary.
Caution #3: If you do need to change these settings, it is important to note that the
factory settings for each specific Printer are recorded on a label on the bottom of the Printer.
Refer to this label if you ever need to reset the Printer settings back to the factory defaults.
Use this option to change the Printer's internal settings for controlling the procedures in this
section.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 242
Print TOF and Print EOF Alignment Procedures
The Print TOF and Print EOF procedures must be performed as a single alignment process.
The goal of these procedures is to align the printed image to precisely line up with the edges
of the card as shown below. Notice that when aligned properly, the test print's Alignment
Arrows will fall just inside the edges of the card.
This information pertains to the two procedures on the next page:
Alignment Test Image: The alignment test image is designed for setting these
parameters. Be sure to run this test after each adjustment. Run the Alignment Test Image
by selecting the following options: MENU, Print Test Image and Gray/Align YMC
(DTC510/515) or Gray/Align YMC/K (DTC520/525).
Value and Settings Changes: Change the settings in the procedures below by
choosing the following options: MENU, Setup Printer and the parameter to be changed.
Change the value by pressing the appropriate scroll button and press SELECT to save
the value.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 243
Preparing to Adjust the Print TOF and Print EOF
Step Procedure
1 Before starting the alignment procedures, you must first establish a baseline
from which to start your adjustments.
To do this, select MENU, Setup Printer and set these starting parameters in
each of the following Setup Printer options: Print TOF: +30 and Print EOF: -30.
Setting the Print TOF
Use this procedure to position the printed image correctly on the leading edge of the card.
Step Procedure
1 Choose MENU, Print Test Image and Gray/Align YMC to print a test card.
2 Select MENU, Setup Printer and Print TOF.
3 Record the Print TOF value on the test card (you just printed).
4 Examine the test card. (Note: When centered properly, the Alignment Arrows
should appear just at the edge of the card's leading edge. If your test card does
not look like the sample shown below, go to Step 5 to adjust the Print TOF.)
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 244
Setting the Print TOF (continued)
Step Procedure
5 a. Decrease the Print TOF value to move the printed image more toward the
leading edge of the card.
b. Increase the Print TOF value to move the printed image more toward the
trailing edge of the card.
The numbers being entered for the settings are in ½ pixels.
The number of pixels is equal to the measurement in inches times 600 or
the measurement in mm times 23.6. (For example, 0.100 inches or
2.54mm equals 60 increments on the LCD.)
6 Press SELECT to save the value and print another test card.
7 Repeat steps 1 to 6 until the test image is correctly positioned as shown above.
Setting the Print EOF
This procedure positions the printed image correctly on the trailing edge of the card.
Step Procedure
1 Choose MENU, Print Test Image and Gray/Align YMC to print a test card.
2 Select MENU, Setup Printer and Print EOF.
3 Record the Print EOF value on the test card you just printed.
4 Examine the test card.
a. When centered properly, the Alignment Arrows should appear just at the
edge of the card's Trailing edge.
b. If the test card does not look like the sample shown below, go to step 5 to
adjust the Ribbon Tension.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 245
Setting the Print EOF (continued)
Step Procedure
5 a. Decrease the Print EOF value to move the printed image more toward the
leading edge of the card.
b. Increase the Print EOF value to move the printed image more toward the
trailing edge of the card.
The numbers being entered for the settings are in ½ pixels.
The number of pixels is equal to the measurement in inches times 600 or
the measurement in mm times 23.6. (For example, 0.100 inches or
2.54mm equals 60 increments on the LCD.)
6 Press SELECT to save the value. Print a test card as described in step 1.
7 Repeat Steps 1 to 6 (above) until the Test Image is correctly positioned or
Ribbon wrinkle is alleviated.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 246
Adjusting the Ribbon Tension
Step Procedure
1 Choose MENU, Print Test Image and Gray/Align YMC to print a test card.
2 Select MENU, Setup Printer and Ribbon Tension.
3 Record the Ribbon Tension value on the test card (you just printed).
4 Examine the test card. (Note: When centered properly, the Alignment Arrows
should appear just at the edge of the card's Trailing edge. If the test card does
not look like the sample shown below, go to step 5 to adjust the Ribbon
Tension.)
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 247
Adjusting the Ribbon Tension (continued)
Step Procedure
5 a. Decrease the Ribbon Tension value to move the end of the image toward the
leading edge of the card if the alignment arrows are not printing on the card,
b. Increase the Ribbon Tension value to move the end of the image toward the
trailing edge of the card.
Caution: Be sure to make adjustments in small increments of ±2, to
avoid over-adjusting this setting. For example, the Ribbon may jam or break if
the setting is set too high.
6 Press SELECT to save the value and print another test card.
7 Repeat Steps 1 to 6 until the test image is correctly positioned. See the previous
page.
Setting the Printhead Resistance
Step Procedure
1 Locate the Printhead Setting Number on the bottom of the Printhead.
The number reads R=XXXX.
2 Select MENU, Setup Printer and Printhead Resistance. Enter the given value
for the Printhead.
3 Press the Select button to save the value.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 248
Adjusting the Image Darkness
Step Procedure
1 Choose MENU, Print Test Image and Gray/Align YMC to print a test card.
2 Select MENU, Setup Printer and Image Darkness.
3 Record the Image Darkness value on the test card last printed.
4 Examine the test card.
5 Adjust the Image Darkness value if needed. Enter a negative value to lighten the
printed image.
OR
Input a positive value to darken the printed image.
Caution: Be sure to make adjustments in small increments of ± 4, to
avoid over-adjusting this setting. The Ribbon can jam or break if the setting is too
high.
6 Press SELECT to save the value.
7 Print a test card as described in Step 1.
8 Repeat Steps 1 to 7 until the image darkness is correct.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 249
Changing the Encoder Settings
Use this option to choose the settings that coincide with the Printer's current encoding
configuration. Use the scroll buttons to select the option (you want to change).
Step Procedure
1 Select MENU, Setup Printer and Encoder Settings.
2 Change the desired option as needed.
Mag: Press the CHANGE button to select None or Installed according to
whether or not a Magnetic Stripe Encoder is installed.
Smart: Press the CHANGE button to select None or Installed according to
whether or not a Smart Card Encoder is installed.
Prox: Press the CHANGE button to select None or Installed according to
whether or not a Prox Card Encoder is installed.
Position: This option is set according to the card size for which your Encoder
is physically positioned inside the Printer. (Note: All DTC500 Series Printers
are configured only for CR-80 size cards.)
Do not change this setting.
3 Press SAVE to save the value.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 250
Adjusting the Magnetic TOF
Use this setting to position the magnetic data at the correct distance from the leading edge of
the card.
The Magnetic TOF is the distance from the edge of the card to the Start Sentinel (SS).
The Start Sentinel marks the beginning of the encoded data. (Note: According to the
magnetic recording standard (ISO 7811), the correct Start Sentinel distance is 0.293
inches ± 0.020 inches (7.44 mm ± 0.51 mm) from the leading edge of the card.)
Step Procedure
1 a. From the application program, print and encode a test card.
b. Measure this distance by making the data visible using a magnetic viewer or
developer solution.
c. Alternatively, use a Magnetic Card Analyzer to measure the Start Sentinel
distance.
2 a. Use a magnetic viewer or developer solution or spray to make the magnetic
data visible (in order to identify the Start Sentinel as the first set of magnetic
lines or first one-bit, which are visibly closer together than the large number
of evenly spaced lines or leading zero-bits that fill the space to the edge of
the card, as shown on the next page).
b. Use a magnifying device with a built-in measuring scale to measure the
distance from the edge of the card to the Start Sentinel in the data, as shown
on the next page.
3 If the Start Sentinel is too far from the leading edge of the card, reduce (or make
negative) the Magnetic TOF setting needs.
OR
If the Start Sentinel is too close to the leading edge of the card, increase (or
make positive) the Magnetic TOF setting needs.
4 Select MENU, Setup Printer and Magnetic TOF.
5 Record the Magnetic TOF value on the test card last printed.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 251
Setting the Magnetic TOF (continued)
Step Procedure
6 Enter a Magnetic TOF value appropriate for the direction for the magnetic data to
move.
As a rule, a shift of ±27 equals about .0625" (1/16") or 1.6mm. (Note: Keep
this in mind when adjusting this option to avoid over-adjusting.)
If the negative value is set too high, for example, the Printer may start
encoding before the card's Magnetic Stripe reaches the encoding head.
7 Repeat steps 1 to 5 until the Magnetic TOF is correct.
8 Press SELECT to save the value.
Magnetic Track Data
.293“ / 7.44mm
Trailing Edge
of Card Leading Edge
of Card
-
+
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 252
Changing the Hopper Settings
Use this option to choose settings related to your Printer's Card Input Hopper. Use the scroll
buttons to select the option to change.
Step Procedure
1 Select MENU, Setup Printer and Hopper Settings.
2 Change the desired option as needed for Input.
Press the CHANGE button to select Single or Dual (based on whether your
Printer model includes a single or dual Card Input Hopper).
3 Change the desired option as needed for Card Sensor.
Press the CHANGE button to turn the Hopper's Card Sensor On or Off.
Note #1: The default setting is for this Sensor to be turned ON. This Sensor
only needs to be turned OFF if you are using blank cards with pre-printed backs,
non-white, dark colored blank cards or with cards that have a Magnetic Stripe in
the non-ISO standard position.
Note #2: In some cases, these types of cards cannot be seen by the Sensor.
This leads the Printer to assume that the Card Input Hopper is empty and that
cards will not feed. Turn the Sensor to OFF to correct this problem.
Change the desired option as needed for Exception Feed.
Press the CHANGE button to turn the Hopper's Exception Card Feed feature
On or Off.
Note #1: The default setting is for this feature to be turned OFF. In this case,
the Card Input Hopper rests in the DOWN position when the Printer is sitting idle
as this promotes easier card loading.
Note #2: If you would like to use the exception feed feature, change this setting
to ON. This will cause the Card Input Hopper to rest in the UP position, allowing
the necessary space (below the Hopper) for exception cards to be inserted. The
only caution when using this feature is that cards must be loaded properly.
3 Press SAVE to save your settings.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 253
Changing the BAUD Rate Settings
Apply this setting only if the Printer provides support for the Embedded Fonts and Bar Codes
option.
Step Procedure
1 Select MENU, Setup Printer and BAUD Rate Settings.
2 Change to the appropriate option: 19200 or 9600.
3 Press the Select button to save the value.
Adjusting the Flipper Offset
Step Procedure
1 Select MENU, Setup Printer and Flipper Offset.
2 Select Level or Encoder Angle.
Use the Level option to set the position of the Flipper so it is level with the
card path.
Use the Encoder Angle option to fine tune the position of the Flipper in
relation to the Printer's built-in Encoder if your Printer is equipped with this
option.
3 Change these settings in small increments if the card is not feeding correctly off
the Card Flipper onto the card path or into he Encoder.
Decrease the Flipper Offset setting to lower the lip of the Flipper.
Increase the setting to raise it.
4 Press the Select button to save the value.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 254
Viewing the Report Supplies
Step Procedure
1 When using monochrome resin-only print Ribbons, use this option to view all of
the following information about the print Ribbon installed in the Printer.
2 When using Dye-Sublimation print Ribbons, it is possible to view only the Type
and Part Number fields.
Type: This displays the name or type of print Ribbon installed.
Prints Remaining: This displays the approximate number of prints
remaining on your Ribbon. This information is helpful for determining about
how many cards you can produce before the next Ribbon change.
Part Number: This displays the specific part number for your Ribbon which
can be helpful when re-ordering.
Lot Number: This displays the print Ribbon's lot number.
Using the Show the Error Count Tool
Use the Show the Error Count tool to (a) troubleshoot the Printer, (b) maintain a log of up to
255 errors, (c) track how many times specific errors occur and (d) determine if certain errors
are occurring more than others (in order to pinpoint an area in the Printer requiring attention).
Step Procedure
1 a. Use the scroll buttons to move through the list of errors.
b. Press the Reset button to clear the entire existing error log and start a new
log. (Note: The error log will stop logging errors once it has reached its
error occurrence limit of 255.)
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 255
Showing the Card Count
Step Procedure
1 Choose SHOW CARD COUNT to view counts for Card Count (CC) and Pass
Count (PC).
Card Count is the total number of cards the Printer has produced.
Pass Count is the total number of print passes made by the Printhead.
(Note: A pass is measured each time a single Ribbon panel is printed or
passes beneath the Printhead.)
Selecting the System Upgrade (Firmware Upgrade)
This option is used to upgrade the Printer Firmware.
Step Procedure
1 Upgrade by selecting SYSTEM UPGRADE.
The LCD will prompt: Are you sure you want to continue?
2 Select YES to begin the System Upgrade.
OR
Select NO to return to the READY screen. See the Updating the Printer’s
Firmware procedure in Section 9, page 259.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 256
Section 9: Firmware Updates
The purpose of this section is to provide the User with information on the internal software or
Firmware, which controls all aspects of the Printer's operation. New Firmware versions may
be released containing enhancements, such as improved reliability, added features or better
print quality. New Firmware updates can be downloaded from the Internet and loaded into
the Printer through its parallel interface port – no chip replacement is needed. Refer to the
instructions in this Section to download and install Firmware updates.
Firmware Version 1.5.9-m for our DTC500 Series, Macintosh-compatible Card
Printer/Encoders. Reference Technical Update No. 43 (dated 11/06/2002).
Previous Firmware Versions: Previous versions of the Firmware would not recognize
the 4-megabyte memory module. (Technician Note: After installing the Macintosh
Firmware, these versions would produce an error that required an 8-megabyte memory
module to be installed in the DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders.)
Firmware Improvement: The new version of the Firmware includes support for the 4-
megabyte memory modules. (Technician Note: These memory modules are now being
installed in all DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders.)
Firmware Updater Application Program
The Firmware Updater application program is the software required to send Firmware
updates from the computer to the Printer. To download and install the Firmware Updater
from this site, refer to the following steps (using Step 1A or Step 1B as appropriate):
Step Procedure
1A Option A: Insert the Software Installation CD into your computer's CD drive.
The CD browser is set to automatically open after a few seconds, however, you
will not need the browser portion of the CD for this process.
a. Once the CD browser has opened, close it by clicking on the exit icon shown
below.
b. Use My Computer or Windows Explorer to view the contents of the CD.
Windows Explorer can be opened by selecting it from the Start, Programs
menu.
c. Open the Utilities folder, then open the Firmware Updater folder.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 257
Firmware Updater Application Program (continued)
Step Procedure
1B Option B: Go to the Fargo Electronics Technical Support Web site:
http://www.fargo.com/tech_support/
Click on the Firmware Updater Program link.
2 Click on OK when prompted to Save this Program to Disk and then select a
folder in which to save the Updater file.
3 a. Once the file has been downloaded, navigate to the location where the file
was saved. The Firmware Updater program has been compressed for ease
of downloading.
b. Decompress the file by double-clicking on the UPDATER.EXE icon.
4 Double-click on the SETUP.EXE file to launch the Firmware Updater Setup
Program
5 Follow the on-screen instructions to complete installation. Once installed, the
Firmware Updater icon will appear in the Start/Programs/Fargo folder.
6 Select the Firmware Updater icon displayed below to open the Firmware Updater
application program.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 258
Downloading Firmware Updates
Step Procedure
1 Refer to the following steps to download Firmware updates:
2 Select the Download Firmware button. If you have Internet access, this will
automatically take you to the Firmware Updates section of the Fargo website. If it
does not, manually open your browser and go to the Firmware Updates section
in the Fargo Electronics Technical Support Web site:
http://www.fargo.com/tech_support/
3 Select your specific printer model and click on the Submit button. Click on the
Firmware file link labeled for the specific Printer model.
4 Click on OK when prompted to Save this Program to Disk and then select a
folder in which to save the Update file.
5 a. Once the file has been downloaded, navigate to the location where the file
was saved. (Note: The Firmware Update file has been compressed for
ease of downloading.)
b. Decompress the file by double-clicking on the designated icon.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 259
Updating the Printer's Firmware
Now that you have installed and opened the Firmware Updater program and downloaded the
firmware update file, you can begin updating your printer's firmware.
It is important to note that there are two types of Firmware for certain Fargo Printer models,
the Main Firmware and the LCD Firmware, each of which has a slightly different update
process.
Updating the Main Firmware
Step Procedure
1 If you have not already done so, select Start -> Programs -> Fargo and open the
Firmware Updater program. From the Firmware Updater program, click the
Select Update File button, as shown on the next page in the Firmware Updater
(Version 3.0.6) window.
2 Go to the folder, in which you saved the update file, select it and click Open.
(Note: The file name, location and version will appear in the Firmware Updater
window, as shown on the next page.)
3 Click the Select Printer button and select the specific Fargo Printer model, click
OK. Once your printer model has been selected, the Send Update button will
become active.
4 At this time, the Printer must be prepared to receive the Firmware update file. To
do this, make sure the Printer is powered ON and in its READY mode. Then,
press the Printer's MENU button.
5 Use the scroll buttons to scroll down to the System Upgrade option and press
SELECT.
When the Printer asks if you would like to continue, press YES.
6 a. Wait while the Printer restarts into the System Upgrade mode.
b. Verify that the interface cable is securely connected to both the Printer and
the computer and press the START button.
The Printer will wait up to 60 seconds to receive the Firmware update
before timing out.
The clock will be indicated on the LCD Display.
7 From the Firmware Updater software, click the Send Update button to bring up
the Firmware Updater dialog box, as shown on the next page.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 260
Updating the Main Firmware (continued)
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 261
Updating the Main Firmware (continued)
Step Procedure
8 Wait: The Firmware update will now take a few minutes.
Check the Printer's LCD for the status. (Note: When the update is complete, the
LCD will indicate if the update was successful.)
9 If the Upgrade Successful is displayed, click on Exit on the Sending Update to
Printer dialog screen.
10 Press the Printer's Exit button.
11 When prompted, turn the Printer power OFF for a few seconds and then back
ON to complete the update process. (Note: As the Printer restarts, you will see
the new Firmware version appear on the LCD.)
12 a. If the upgrade was not successful, the LCD will either display Upgrade
Failed or Upgrade Firmware Now on boot up.
b. If you receive this message, try updating the Firmware again.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 262
Updating the LCD Firmware
Step Procedure
1 Make sure the Printer is powered ON, connected to the PC and in its READY
mode.
2 From the Firmware Updater program, click on the Select Update File button.
3 Go to the folder, in which you saved the update file, select it and click Open.
The file name, location and version will appear in the Firmware Updater
window, as shown on the next page.
4 Click on the Select Printer button and select the specific Fargo Printer model,
click OK.
5 Click on the Send Update button to bring up the Firmware Updater dialog box,
as shown on the next page.
6 Wait a few minutes while the Firmware updates itself. Check the Printer's LCD
for the status. When the update is complete, the LCD will indicate if the update
was successful.
If Upgrade Successful is displayed, click Exit on the Sending Update to
Printer dialog screen. Press the Printer's EXIT button. When prompted, turn
the Printer power OFF for a few seconds and then back ON to complete the
update process. As the Printer restarts, you will see the new Firmware
version appear on the LCD.
If the upgrade was not successful, the LCD will display Upgrade Failed or
Upgrade Firmware Now on boot up.
If you receive this message, try updating the Firmware again.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 263
Updating the LCD Firmware (continued)
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 264
Section 10: DTC500 Enhancement Kit
Instructions Overview
The DTC500 Enhancement Kit includes several easily installed items that will enhance the
functionality of your DTC500 Series Card Printer. Please refer to these instructions to install
each of the items in this kit. These instructions will walk you through installing these
enhancements into Printers that are still in their factory packaging. If the Printer is already
unboxed and set up, ignore the steps (provided in this document) that refer to unpacking and
repackaging the Card Printer.
If you have any questions, please feel free to contact FARGO Electronics Support Services
online at: http://www.fargopartner.com/support_services/online_support.asp
Reviewing the Parts (included with the Kit; 1 set per Card Printer)
Description Part Number Description Part Number
Poly bag 260176 Card Weight(s)
(2 for DTC515/525)
D850448
Software Installation
CD 510805 TOF Card Sensor
Retention Bracket D850455
DTC5XX Firmware
Update Diskette 510858 Plastite screw F000177
Retainer Clip 897144 Quick Start Guide L000107
Main Pulley D850190 Top Cover Media
Loading Label L000108
Card Input Hopper 1 D850253-01 Input Hopper Door
Label L000188
Card Input Hopper 2
(DTC515/525) D850253-02 Yellow Cardboard
Cleaning Cartridge
Insert
L000160
Cleaning Cartridge
Assembly D850254 Upgrade Instruction
Disk L000196
Card Feed Roller (1) D850415 Snap Ring (2)
E-Clip (2)
140048
140062
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 265
Reviewing the required Tools
Phillips #1 screwdriver (1)
Torx T10 screwdriver (1)
Centronics parallel print cable (1)
Computer (1)
Software: Requires (a) DTC500 Firmware version 1.5.1 (510858; included with diskette);
(b) FARGO Firmware Updater Program (included with Software Installation CD); and (c)
DTC500 Printer Driver (included with Software Installation CD).
Reviewing the required Media supplies
30 mil UltraCards cards (081754)
YMCKO Ribbon (086031)
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 266
Updating the Process Strategy
Determining the Card Printer qualifications for the Update
Step Procedure
1 Ensure that the Serial Number starts at A117 or at a larger number. (Note:
Printers later than A140 will have the Upgrade items already factory-installed.)
2 Ensure that the Card Feed Rollers are the black, high gloss (more tacky) types.
See below. (Note: The Card Feed Rollers should not be the gray, standard
Drive Rollers, used in the Card Printer.)
3 Use this Enhancement Kit for all DTC500 Card Printers.
Printers that are older than this serial number may require additional
Upgrades.
Printers that use the gray Feed Roller may also require additional Upgrades.
(Note: Contact the FARGO Technical Support for more details on additional
Upgrades.)
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 267
Unpacking the Card Printer
Step Procedure
1 Remove the handles for the side of the box to release the Cover.
2 Remove the Cover and set it aside (upturned) in order to hold its parts.
3 a. Remove the Printer from the box.
b. Place the foam back inside the box cover.
4 Set the Printer on the bench and remove the plastic bag wrap.
5 Remove the shipping tape from the Output Hopper, the Cover, and the
Communication Ports. (Note: Do not discard the tape since it can be used
again during repackaging.)
6 a. Open the print Cover.
b. Remove the blue-colored Quality Assurance Certificate and the white-colored
Cleaning Cartridge (D850254) Instruction sheet.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 268
Removing the Printer's main plastic casing
Step Procedure
1 Open the Top Cover of the Printer.
2 Use the Philips screwdriver to remove the two (2) screws inside the Top Cover,
as shown below.
3 Open the Card Input Hopper Door to allow for proper clearance, as shown
below.
4 Release the four (4) latches at the bottom corners of the Printer.
5 Lift off the Printer main plastic casing, as shown below.
6 Unplug the LCD display at plug J18 on the Main Circuit Board.
7 Unplug the Ground Strap from the Spade Connector, which is on top of the
Power Supply Housing.
Screws
Top Cover
Release Corner
Latches
Card
Hopper Door
Main Plastic
Casing
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 269
Inspecting the Drive Pulley
Step Procedure
1 Locate the Drive Roller to the right of the Platen at the front of the Printer, as
shown below.
2 Turn the Pulley by hand to determine whether it is firm or it is not firm.
3 If the Pulley is firm, continue to the next procedure. (Note: This means that
Pulley does not move without rotating the Shaft.)
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 270
Inspecting the Drive Pulley (continued)
Step Procedure
4 If the Pulley is not firm on the Shaft, replace it according to the procedure
provided directly below. (Note: This means that the Pulley moves without
rotating the Shaft.)
a. Turn the Roller until the flat side on the Roller Shaft faces the input of the
Printer.
b. Confirm that all the flat sides on the Roller Drive Shafts also face the Input
side.
c. Remove the Pulley from the Shaft by grasping the Pulley and pulling
outward.
d. Remove the Drive Belt from the Pulley.
e. Position the new Pulley with the three (3) mold dots facing out, as shown
below.
f. Place the Drive Belt around the new Pulley.
g. Place the new Pulley against the Shaft.
Caution: Be careful to align the flat of the Pulley with the Shaft flat.
h. Press the new Pulley onto the Shaft.
Shaft flat facing Printer input
Molding dots facing out
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 271
Installing the Push-Clip onto the Drive Roller
Step Procedure
1 Push the metal Clip onto end of the Feed Roller until it is seated against Pulley
face, as shown below.
2 Confirm that the Clip is fully seated and secure in order to ensure that it will not
pull off.
Clip on
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 272
Removing and installing the Card Feed Roller (D850415)
Refer to Drawing No. D850261
Tools Required: Phillips-Head Screwdriver, Retaining Ring Pliers, Small Standard
Screwdriver
Step Procedure
1
Caution: Turn OFF the Printer and unplug the power cord from the
Printer.
2 Determine if there is a black or gray Card Feed Roller installed in the Printer.
a. Black Card Feed Roller: Determine if the Card Feed Roller is good or bad.
(Note: A bad Card Feed Roller has flaking of the Roller’s surface that
causes dirty cards.)
If it is a good Card Feed Roller, then do not replace it.
If it is a bad Card Feed Roller, then replace it according to Steps 3 to 13
in this procedure.
OR
b. Gray Card Feed Roller: If there is a gray Roller installed, then replace it
according to Steps 3 to 13 in this procedure.
3 Remove the Hoppers.
4 Remove the Pulley from the Feed Roller Shaft. (Note: You may have to pull the
Pulley on the Cleaning Roller Shaft to the end of the Shaft to help ease the Belt
tension.)
5 Remove the Snap Ring (140048) from the Shaft.
Caution: Be careful not to bend the Snap Ring too far.
6 Remove the E-Clip (140062) on the other end of the Shaft.
7 Remove the Bushings.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 273
Inspecting, replacing, and installing the Card Feed Roller (D850415) (continued)
Step Procedure
8 Slide the old Shaft out.
Install the new Card Feed Roller (D850415). (Note: Ensure that the flat on the
Shaft extends through the front Sideplate.)
9 Re-install the Bushings.
10 Re-install the Snap Ring and the E-Clip.
11 Install a new Pulley (D850190) onto the Feed Roller Shaft.
a. Turn the Cleaning Roller and the Feed Roller so that the flats face toward the
Output Hopper. (Note: The flats must be in the same position.)
b. Loop the Belt over the Cleaning Roller Pulley and over the new Pulley,
aligning the flat of the Pulley to the flat of the Shaft.
c. On the Feed Roller, place the flat of the Pulley against the flat of the Shaft.
d. Press the Pulley onto the Shaft. (Note: Use careful force here because you
are working against the Belt.)
Caution: It is important not to roll the Pulley into the flat of the Shaft. If
the shaft is rolled into the flat, the flat can shear out the crush ribs inside the
Pulley. Removing these ribs allows for free play in the Pulley and causes a poor
fit.
e. Slide the Cleaning Roller Pulley back into position. Slide the Feed Roller
Pulley to the point where it is in line with the Cleaning Roller Pulley. (Note:
The Pulleys need to be straight to prevent wear on the Belt.)
12 Re-install the E-Clip on the end of the Cleaning Roller.
13 Re-install the Hopper.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 274
Installing the Sensor Holder
Step Procedure
1 Remove the Card Output Hopper.
a. Pull the Card Output Hopper out until it reaches its stop.
b. Pull back on the tab on the under side of the Printer's Baseplate.
c. Remove the Card Output Hopper from the Printer.
2 Lift out the Print Arm.
Continued on the next page
Output Hopper
Print Arm
View inside Printer from
Output Hopper
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 275
Installing the Sensor Holder (continued)
Step Procedure
3 Reach through the Output Hopper opening with the Sensor holder and press
onto the underside of the TOF Sensor. (Note: Hold the Sensor to your fingertip
with two-sided tape for careful, steady Sensor installation.)
Continued on the next page
Holder Fully Seated
See (above) the underside view of the TOF Holder.
Pressing Holder onto TOF
See (above) the path to install the TOF Holder.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 276
Installing the Sensor Holder (continued)
Step Procedure
4 Seat the upper portion along the black Card Guide. (Note: Be sure it is fully
seated.)
5 Tighten the Plastitie screw (F000177) into the Sensor holder, as shown below.
Caution: Do not overtighten. Do not use a power driver for this
process. Hand tighten only.
6 Lower the Print Arm.
7 Re-install the Card Output Hopper back into its position.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 277
Installing the new Card Input Hopper in the single Hopper units
(DTC510/520)
Step Procedure
1 Turn the Card Input Hopper Lift Drive Gear (by hand ) in order to raise the
Hopper if the Hopper is not in the UP position. See below. (Note: This ensures
that the exception feed is clear.)
2 a. Face the Card Printer from the Card Input Hopper.
b. Remove the three (3) screws that hold the Card Input Hopper to the Frame,
as shown below (to the right).
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 278
Installing the new Card Input Hopper in the single Hopper units (DTC510/520)
(continued)
Step Procedure
3 Slide the Card Input Hopper to the left in order to remove it from the Track, as
shown below.
4 Install the new Card Input Hopper by sliding it to the right, as shown below.
(Note: Ensure that the plastic guide is set along the Track.)
Continued on the next page
See (above) the Hopper Track.
See (above ) a Hopper Track.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 279
Installing the new Card Input Hopper in the single Hopper units (DTC510/520)
(continued)
Step Procedure
5 a. Confirm that there is a small metal washer in the left hole (toward the front of
the Printer) of the three (3) Card Input Hopper screw holes. See below.
(Note: It should be captured within the plastic molding of the Hopper.)
b. If the washer is missing, use the washer from the old Card Input Hopper.
6 Replace the three (3) screws that hold the Card Input Hopper to the Frame.
Caution: Do not tighten these screws.
7 Press down on the top of the Card Input Hopper to apply a bias toward the
bottom of the Printer. (Note: This ensures that the Card Input Hopper is seated
properly.)
8 While holding the Card Input Hopper down, tighten the three (3) screws.
9 Discard the old Card Input Hopper.
See (above) the hole with the washer.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 280
Installing the new Card Input Hopper in the dual Hopper units
(DTC515/525)
Step Procedure
1 Remove the Card Input Hopper 1 (D850253-01) first. See below.
2 a. View the Printer from the Card Input Hopper.
b. Remove the three (3) screws that hold the Card Input Hopper to the Frame,
as shown below.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 281
Installing the new Card Input Hopper in the dual Hopper units (DTC515/525)
(continued)
Step Procedure
3 Slide the Card Input Hopper to the left to remove it from the Track.
4 Remove the second Hopper (see Steps 2 and 3 in this same procedure).
5 Locate and install the new Card Input Hopper 2 (D850253-02).
6 a. Install the new Hopper by sliding it toward the back of the Printer.
b. Ensure that the plastic Guide is set along the Track. See below.
Continued on the next page
See (above) the Hopper Track.
See (above) the Hopper Track.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 282
Install the new Card Input Hopper in the dual Hopper units (DTC515/525)
(continued)
Step Procedure
7 a. Confirm that there is a small metal washer in the left hole (toward the front of
Printer) of the three (3) Card Input Hopper screw holes. See below. (Note:
It should be captured within the plastic molding of the Card Input Hopper.)
b. If the washer is missing, use the washer from the old Hopper.
8 Replace the three (3) screws that hold the Card Input Hopper to the Frame.
Caution: Do not tighten these screws.
9 Install the Hopper 1 as described above.
10 Press down on the top of the Card Input Hoppers to apply a bias toward the
bottom of the Printer. (Note: This ensure the Hoppers are seated properly.)
11 While holding the Card Input Hoppers down, tighten the three (3) screws.
12 Discard the old Card Input Hoppers.
See (above) the hole with the washer.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 283
Applying the Close Door While Printing Label (L000188)
Step Procedure
1 Apply the Keep Door Closed While Printing Label (L000188) to the inside of
the Input Hopper door, as shown below.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 284
Applying the Ribbon Loading Label (L000108)
Step Procedure
1 Apply the Ribbon Loading Label (L000108) to the inside of the Top Cover
directly over the existing label. See below.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 285
Replacing the plastic Printer casing
Step Procedure
1 Plug the LCD control panel in to J18 of the Main Circuit Board.
2 Replace the ground strap onto the Spade connector above the Power Supply
casing.
3 Confirm that wires are still firmly routed through the Cover.
4 On the Main Cover, open the Card Input Hopper Door to allow for clearance.
5 Set the casing back onto Printer.
6 Confirm that all wires are inside the casing.
7 Press the Cover down until the four (4) corner latches are secure.
8 Replace the two (2) screws that hold the casing on the Frame.
a. Place the screws into the holes and partially tighten them.
Caution: Do not tighten them completely.
b. Align the top edge of the casing with the edge of the Printer side plate.
c. Tighten the two (2) cover screws to hold the casing in place. (Note: This
should be done while holding the front of the main casing even with the
Printer's front side plate. See below.)
Align the Cover with the Side Plate.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 286
Powering up the Unit and confirming its Ready status
Step Procedure
1 Load the YMCKO Ribbon into the Printer.
2 With the Power Switch turned OFF, insert the Power Cord into the Power Port,
located on the back of the Printer.
3 Insert the other end of the Power Cord into an available outlet.
4 Connect the Printer to PC using parallel cable.
5 Press or turn ON the Power Switch to the Printer. (Note: Once the Printer's start-
up sequence is completed, the LCD should read READY.)
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 287
Upgrading the Firmware to Version 1.5.1
Step Procedure
1 Prepare the Printer.
a. Select Menu from the LCD Control Panel.
b. Scroll down to the Upgrade Printer and hit Select.
c. Select Yes when asked to continue with the Upgrade.
2 Install the Firmware Updater Program. (Note: Ignore this step if the program is
already installed on PC.)
a. Locate the Software Installation CD packaged with the Printer.
b. Insert the CD into the Computer's CD drive.
c. If the CD begins auto-play sequence, select Exit using the on-screen Menu.
d. Select the Run command from Window's Start Menu.
e. Click on the Browse button.
f. Select Setup.exe from the \Utilities\Firmware Updater\ directory on the CD.
g. Once selected, click on OK to run the set-up program.
h. Follow the on-screen instructions to install the Updater utility.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 288
Upgrading the Firmware to Version 1.5.1 (continued)
Step Procedure
3 Prepare the PC.
a. Insert the DTC5XX Firmware Update Disk into the Computer's Diskette
Drive.
b. In Windows, open the Firmware Updater Program from the Windows Start
Menu, as shown below.
c. Click on the Select Update File button, as shown below.
d. Navigate to the 5DTC151.S19 Firmware file on the diskette. Select it and
click on Open.
e. Click on Select Printer button, as shown below.
f. Select DTC510-515/ DTC520-525 and click on OK.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 289
Upgrading the Firmware to Version 1.5.1 (continued)
Step Procedure
4 Start the Update.
a. Go to the Printer LCD and select Start.
b. Go to the PC and click on Send Update.
(Note: The PC and Printer LCD will show update status as the Firmware is
transferred.)
5 Finish the Update. (Note: Upon completion, the LCD will state Upgrade
Successful.)
a. Press the EXIT button and cycle the power to the Printer.
b. Upon power-up, confirm that the new Firmware (Version 1.5.1) appears in
the LCD window.
c. Click on the Exit button to close the Updater dialog box.
6 a. If the Update Failed or Update System Now message appears, repeat the
Powering up the Unit and confirming its Ready status procedure in this
same document.
b. If the failure persists, contact the FARGO Technical Support for assistance.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 290
Confirming the Printer operations
Step Procedure
1 Load the Cards into the Input Hopper(s), as shown below.
2 Place the Card Weight on top of the Input stack(s), as shown below.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 291
Confirming the Printer operations (continued)
Step Procedure
3 Confirm that the YMCKO Ribbon is loaded into the Printer.
4 a. Load a Cleaning Cartridge into the Printer, as shown below.
b. Carefully cut the pack open.
c. Remove the Cartridge if it is a new Printer with the cleaning cartridge still
sealed in the supplies pack (mounted inside the box).
5 Ensure the Printer is connected to the PC.
6 Power-up the Printer and confirm that the Printer shows Ready on the LCD
Control Panel.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 292
Confirming the Printer operations (continued)
Step Procedure
7 Check for proper image alignment. See the next page for this procedure.
a. From the LCD control Panel, select Menu, then Print Test Image, and
then Gray/Align YMC/K. (Note: The Printer will print a self-test with an
array of gray squares and alignment arrows along the edge of the card.)
b. Use the arrows along the edge of the card to confirm the proper alignment,
as shown below. (Note: The gray arrows should be evenly aligned along
the edges of the card.)
c. If the gray arrows are not aligned properly, adjust the arrows as needed.
TOF (Top of Form): This aligns the image to the leading edge of the
card. (Note: A higher number will move print away from card edge, to
the right, as viewed from the front of the Printer. A lower number will
move print toward the card edge, to the left, as viewed from the front of
the Printer.)
EOF (End of Form): This aligns the image to the trailing edge of the
card. (Note: A higher number will move the print to the right
adjustment to roughly match the TOF alignment arrows. A lower
number will move the print to the left adjustment to roughly match the
TOF alignment arrows.)
d. After making changes through the LCD settings, print a Self Test in order to
confirm the proper alignment.
e. If the Ribbon breaks when printing, tape the Ribbon back onto the spool.
(Note: Use the LCD controls to add +10 to the TOF value and begin the
process again.)
f. Repeat this procedure (as needed) until the proper alignment is achieved.
g. Once this procedure is completed, make appropriate the TOF and EOF
changes to the Settings sticker at the bottom of the Printer, using a
permanent black marker.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 293
Confirming the Printer operations (continued)
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 294
Confirming the Printer operations (continued)
Step Procedure
8 Print the sample cards from the PC.
a. From the Windows Start Menu, select Settings\Printers to open the
Printers window.
b. Double click on the DTC510-515/ DTC520-525 Printer icon to open the
driver window.
c. Select Properties from the File menu to bring up the Driver Options
window. See the next three pages to review the Print Drivers.
Document Defaults if in Windows NT.
Printing Preferences if in Windows 2000.
d. Click on the Test Print button on the Card tab of the Driver options.
(Note: The Printer will print a sample card.)
e. Inspect the card to ensure proper image print and placement.
f. Compare the card to the sample shipped with the Printer on the blue
Quality Assurance Certificate for reference.
9 For Dual Hoppers, confirm the Hopper operation.
a. From the LCD menu, select H1 and H2 to the alternate Hopper positions.
b. Watch the Hopper movements to ensure the Hoppers are properly aligned.
c. Using a graphics application, print the sample cards using the cards from
both the Hoppers.
d. Ensure that the Hoppers lift and move properly.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 295
Confirming the Printer operations (continued)
See the previous procedure.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 296
Confirming the Printer operations (continued)
See the previous procedure.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 297
Confirming the Printer operations (continued)
See the previous procedure.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 298
Removing the Media from the Printer
The following have now been removed from the Printer:
Card Weights (D850448)
Cards
Print Ribbon
Cleaning Cartridge
(Note: At this point, the Upgrade is complete. If repackaging the Printer for delivery,
continue with to the next procedure.)
Repackaging the Printer
Step Procedure
1 a. Discard the white Cleaning Cartridge Instruction sheet. Replace it with the
yellow card.
b. Insert this yellow card into the empty Cleaning Cartridge slot inside the
Printer.
2 Set the blue Quality Assurance Certificate onto the Print Arm.
3 Tape all openings closed.
a. Cover the Communication Ports with tape.
b. Tape the Top Cover closed at two (2) locations.
c. Tape the Output Tray in place.
4 Pack the new Cleaning Cartridge.
a. Carefully cut open the supply pack on the bottom of the shipping box, if it is
not already open.
b. Remove the old Cleaning Cartridge.
Remove the cleaning Roller from the old Cartridge. Retain it as a spare
Roller.
Discard the rest of the old Cleaning Cartridge.
c. Place new cartridge (with the sticker and the liner applied) into the pack.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 299
Repackaging the Printer (continued)
Step Procedure
5 Replace the L000107 Quick Start Guide with the new Guide.
6 Replace the Installation CD with the new CD.
7 Carefully tape shut the supply pack after it is updated.
8 Package the Card Weights.
a. Place the card weights into the poly bag (260176). (Note: Ensure there is
one Card Weight per Hopper.)
b. Place the bag with the power cords into the poly bag.
c. Tape the poly bag closed.
9 Re-box the Printer.
a. Carefully lay the Printer onto its front and pull on the poly bag.
b. Carefully lift the Printer over onto its back, neatly fold the bag, and tape it to
the bottom of the Printer.
c. Carefully set the Printer on the Output end and place the foam onto the
Input end of the Printer.
d. Carefully flip the Printer over onto the foam and place the other foam piece
onto the output end.
e. Place the Printer into the bottom of the box.
f. Load the Cord bag into the corner of the box next to the front Output side of
the Printer (with the weights facing the box).
g. Put on the Top Box, and insert both the Handles and the lock.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 300
Section 11: Fargo Technical Support
The purpose of this section to provide the User with an efficient, step-by-step procedure to
be used when contacting Fargo Technical Support as needed for the DTC500 series card
Printer.
Contacting Fargo Technical Support
Step Procedure
1 Read the suggested Sections of the Technical Service and Maintenance Manual in
order to troubleshoot this Printer.
As needed, contact the Fargo Technical Support Group for additional, technical
assistance:
by phone at (952) 941-0050.
OR
by fax at (952) 941-1852.
OR
Contact Fargo Technical Support via the Web:
http://www.fargo.com/tech_support/contact_tech_support.asp
2 Position a phone near the Printer and Computer so Fargo technicians can help
troubleshoot the Printer(s).
3 Please have a self-test and a sample card ready when calling Fargo Technical
Support.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 301
Reading the Serial Numbers on a Fargo printer
The purpose of this section is to provide updated instructions for reading serial numbers on a
Fargo printer.
Finding out when a Fargo Card Printer was manufactured
You can determine when your card printer was manufactured by reading directly from the
serial number (affixed to your card printer).
1. Year Built: The first two digits in the serial number indicate the year that the printer was
manufactured.
2. Week Built: The second two digits indicate the week.
3. Numeric Order: The last four digits indicate the sequence number for the numeric order
in which the printers were built.
Reviewing Example No. 1: Serial Number 80453289
1. 80453289: The first two digits in the serial number indicate the year the printer was built
(e.g., the digits 80 indicate the year 1998).
2. 80453289: The third and fourth digits in the serial number indicate the week the printer
was built (e.g., the digits 45 indicate week 45 of that year).
3. 80453289: The last four digits indicate the sequence number for the numeric order in
which the printers were built.
Reviewing Example No. 2: Serial Number A1280224
1. A1280224: The first two digits in the serial number indicate the year the printer was built
(e.g., the letter and digit A1 indicate the year 2001).
2. A1280224: The third and fourth digits in the serial number indicate the week the printer
was built (e.g., the digits 28 indicate week 28 of that year).
3. A1280224: The last four digits indicate the sequence number for the numeric order in
which the printers were built.
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 302
Section 12: Reviewing Spare Parts Lists
Reviewing the Spare Parts List for DTC500 Series Card Printer
DTC5xx Series ID Card Printer
Recommended Spare Parts List
Effective Date: April 2005
For current pricing see http://www.fargopartner.com/support_services/
Reviewing the Spare Parts List for the DTC500 LAM
DTC500 LAM Spare Parts List
Recommended Spare Parts List
Effective Date: April 2005
For current pricing see http://www.fargopartner.com/support_services/
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 303
Glossary of Terms
Term Definition
24-bit color A color depth for an image that uses 8 bits for each color (red,
blue, green) combining the possible 256 shades to provide a color
depth of 16.7 million colors.
AC - Alternating
Current An electrical current that reverses its direction at regular intervals
(typically 50 - 60 times a second).
Access Card The card for the SmartGuard security system. A cared with
embedded electronics that can be removed from the Printer,
locking the Printer and preventing unauthorized use.
Adhesion The firm attachment of a material to the card surface, confirmed
by using the Tape Test -pulling an applied piece of adhesive tape
(Scotch 600 or equivelent) off the card at 1 sec/in to see if any
material is pulled off by the tape.
Algebraic A type of color matching that takes the colors value of pixels and
applies them to an algebraic equation to adjust the levels of hue,
saturation and brightness.
ANSI (American
National Standards
Institute)
The United States Representative to ISO, providing
standardization for U.S. Manufactures prior or in addition, to
acceptance by ISO.
AS400 An IBM operating system running on a main frame. DTC500
Fargo Printers are built with fonts saved in the Printer memory so
users of AS400 can write escape codes and print from the Printer.
ASCII (American
Standard Code for
Information
Interchange)
A standard for processing information in computer processors.
An 8-bit character set of 255 decimal numbers, each assigned to
numbers, letters, punctuation and special characters.
AT Refers to an IBM standard in early computing with regard to the
chipset and function of the Parallel Port, set up in the BIOS.
B (Black) Black Dye-Sublimation panels are distinguished from the black
panel using resin by the use of B for Dye-Sublimation black. K
denotes resin black.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 304
Glossary of Terms (continued)
Term Definition
Barcodes A series of alternating black and white stripes, of varying widths
(each character denoted by a set number and width of black
stripes) that allows characters to be optically read by a computer.
batch print A file sent down from the computer that contains commands to
print a number of cards, sequentially.
Battery Back-up A power supply that can keep AC electronic equipment running
for a short time when power is interrupted, allowing enough time
for the user to save data and close the machine properly.
Bi-directional A communication standard that allows two-way data transfer
between PC and Printer.
BIOS (Basic
Input/Output System)
The part of the operating system in a computer that handles
communication between the PC mainboard and its peripherals.
Typically residing in chip-based, non-volatile memory.
Bit An abbreviation for binary digital. Each bit is an element of
information that can have two states: off and on.
Bit map A graphic produced by an array of pixel elements with the color
hue, brightness and saturation information stored in bits. The
more bits, the more values and thus the greater variety. 1 bit color
is black and white, 8-bit color produces 256 shades of gray and
24-bit color can produce 16.7 million colors.
Board A term used for the circuit board, a hard mylar plate made of
many layers, that holds the electronic circuit elements and wire
traces.
Boot-up A series of operations that the Printer runs through when power is
first applied including a series of initializing, status testing and a
diagnostics program to ensure a ready state.
Buffer A block of memory, in the Printer or PC, that holds print files until
the processor is ready to print them.
Cable A set of conductors wrapped together and often concealed within
insulation, used for signal transfer from one device to another,
with connectors on either end that allows the cable to be
removed.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 305
Glossary of Terms (continued)
Term Definition
Cache A type of memory Buffer to store data temporarily, used to hold
information that is most often exchanged between contRoller and
peripheral, to expedite data transfer.
Calibrating A procedure to adjust an electro-mechanical device so that it
operates within established parameters.
Cleaning Roller High tack Rollers positioned just after the input hopper to lift
debris off the card as it rolls over it. A clean card surface improves
print quality.
CD (Compact Disc) A 4.75 inch (12 cm) optical disk that stores data, written too and
read from using a laser.
DMA (Direct Memory
Access) Channels designated within the Windows operating environment
that are used for dedicated high-speed communication between
the PC and the Printer port.
Centronics A parallel communications interface that has become the
standard for connections to Printers, designed by the Centronics
Corp.
Coercivity The property of a Magnetic Stripe that indicates the amount of
force needed before magnetic saturation, measured in Oersted
(Oe).
Color matching The process of adjusting color hue, saturation and brightness, to
duplicate a desired color. An algorithm within the driver, which
adjusts the color balance and provides output with the desired
color, automates this process.
Compressed air Air stored in a tank or produced by an aerosol can, delivered by
through nozzle at a high speed. Used in the Printer to blow out
debris.
Contrast The degree of difference in luminance of two areas.
Control panel The panel on the Printer from which the user can control Printer
functions. The Printer is usually composed of the control buttons
and an LED or LCD display.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 306
Glossary of Terms (continued)
Term Definition
CR-79 A card dimension standard of 2.0625" L X 3.3125" W (+/-0.002"
W, +/-0.005" L) or 52.400 X 84.150 mm.
CR-80 A card dimension standard of 2.125" X 3.370" (+/-0.002" W, +/-
0.005" L) or 53.975 X 85.598 mm.
CR-90 A card dimension standard of 2.375" X 3.625" (+/-0.002" W, +/-
0.005" L) or 60.325 X 92.075 mm.
CR-100 A card dimension standard of 2.625" X 3.875" (+/-0.002" W, +/-
0.005" L) or 66.675 X 98.425 mm.
Cursor The marker in the LCD display Window that indicates the active
selection.
Darkness A reference to color saturation.
DB-9 A 9 pin, D-shaped connector, typically used in serial port
interfaces.
DC Motor A Motor that works on DC with continuous motion.
DC (Direct Current) Electronic flow that is unidirectional, flowing from the positive (+)
to negative (-) of a power source.
Default A setting or parameter that comes preset from the factory in driver
or Firmware. Performance parameters can be customized in the
driver, but can be reset to the factory values usually through the
push of the default button. The default values for the Firmware
are usually denoted on a label attached to the Printer.
Defrag Abbreviation for defragmenting. The process of reformatting data
on a hard drive so that it uses space more efficiently.
DIP switches (Dual
In-line Package
Switches)
A small array of mechanical switches installed on the board that
can be configured to change Printer operations including
providing a variety of self-tests.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 307
Glossary of Terms (continued)
Term Definition
Direct-to-Card (DTC)
Printing The Direct-to-Card printing process prints digital images directly
onto any plastic card with a smooth, clean, glossy PVC surface.
Dither A system of distributing dots to control the hue, brightness and /or
saturation. In monochrome printing, this controls the brightness.
In color printing, Dithering can supply a larger color gamut than
non-Dithering. In the driver, Dither modes can be selected to
provide better image quality depending on the type of image to be
printed.
Dongle A peripheral that attaches to a port to act as a key for an installed
application. The PC is able to run that application only when the
dongle is installed. Typically, it works as a pass-through device
and is connected in serial to the parallel cable.
Dot The smallest unit of an image that the Printer is able to produce.
The smaller the dot, see dot pitch, the sharper the image.
Dot pitch A measurement of image sharpness denoting the width of the
dots that makes up a pixel. The smaller the pitch, the sharper the
image.
Download The transfer of a data file from one device to the other over a
network or cable, typically from the Internet to a PC.
DPI (Dot Per Inch) A measurement of the Printer resolution indicating how many dots
a Printer can produce in a linear inch.
DRAM (Dynamic
Random Access
Memory)
A microchip based volatile memory storage device. The Printer
uses this to Buffer a print job, transferred from the PC, until the
Printer contRoller is able to process the packet.
Driver Software utility installed in Windows, that interfaces an application
to rasterize image data and include command codes so the
Printer can process the file.
Duplex Printing Printing on the front and the back of the card.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 308
Glossary of Terms (continued)
Term Definition
Dwell Time The speed at which the card moves across the lam Roller,
measured in seconds/inch (sec/in). This can be adjusted in the
driver to ensure adhesion and card flatness.
Dye Migration The diffusion of dye out of the card surface and into another
receptive surface, such as a vinyl pouch card holder, resulting in a
faded image.
Dye-Sublimation Also called dye diffusion/thermal transfer, it is the process of
heating a dye suspended in a cellulous substrate until the dye can
flow, diffusing into the dye receptive surface of the card or InTM.
This produces the image in the surface of the card.
E-card An abbreviation for electronic card. A generic term used to
reference any card with built-in electronic devices such as Smart
Cards or prox cards.
E-card Docking
Station The device in the Printer that accepts Smart Cards with an ISO
Smart Card contact Station. This allows the user to write to the
Smart Card chip with a standard RS-232 interface in the back of
the Printer or with the optional built-in Encoder.
Edge-to-Edge Refers to the maximum printable area on a card resulting in
printed cards with virtually no border.
ECP Mode
(Enhanced
Capabilities Port
Mode)
A type of Parallel Port mode, developed by Microsoft, to increase
the port throughput and improve performance.
EE Memory An abbreviation for EEPROM.
EEPROM
(Electrically Erasable
Programmable Read
Only Memory)
A microchip based non-volatile memory storage device that can
be rewritten in the field. The chip can hold new values as the
Printer adapts its operational parameters.
Encoder (Smart
Card) An electro-mechanical interface to transfer data from the PC to a
chip or Magnetic Stripe built into the card.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 309
Glossary of Terms (continued)
Term Definition
Encoder (wheel) An electromechanical device, attached to a shaft that detects the
change in rotational position, incremented to count ticks per
revolution. The Printer's Encoder wheel both detects motion and
measures the amount of rotation in the movement of the Ribbon.
Engine A generic term for a collection of systems and mechanisms that is
dedicated to executing a specific function. A Printer that also
laminates would have both a print engine and a lamination
engine.
EOF (End Of Form) The trailing edge of the card, detected to indicate when the Printer
should stop printing.
EPP (Enhanced
Parallel Port) A type of Parallel Port mode, developed by Intel, to increase the
port throughput.
EPROM
(Electronically
Programmable Read
Only Memory)
A microchip based non-volatile memory storage device that
cannot be rewritten in the field. Firmware for many Fargo Printers
is stored on these chips and so a change of the chip is necessary
for an upgrade.
Escape sequence A string or control character that indicates to the processor that
what follows is a command and not data.
ESD (ElectroStatic
Discharge) The discharge of static electricity (high voltage, low current) that
can damage electronic devices.
Ethernet A system of networking a series of computers for the sharing of
data or peripherals.
Film A thin flexible transparent sheet used to carry dye-impregnated
material or resin to be transferred to the card.
Firmware The instruction set, stored in chip memory, inside the Printer that
controls functional and operational data. Some models require a
chip change for updates; some Firmware can be changed by
reprogramming from the PC.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 310
Glossary of Terms (continued)
Term Definition
Flash Memory A microchip based non-volatile memory device that holds its data
when power is removed. This allows for field reprogramming of
the Printer commands, such as Printer Firmware upgrades,
without the necessity of changing chips.
Font A character set similar in style and form. Fonts can be graphical
or mathematical constructs, represented by a series of dots or an
assembly of curves and lines.
FPGA (Field
Programmable Gate
Array)
A microchip with configurable logic circuits installed that is
programmed to act as the Printer's central processor.
Full bleed Printing that covers the entire card surface.
Gamma The degree of contrast of an image or the display of a monitor
determined by the slope of a characteristic curve relating optical
density to relative log exposure.
Glossy/Matte A smooth polished surface in comparison to a rougher matte
surface. Fargo matte cards have a surface index (Ra) of
approximately 65 microinches while glossy have a Ra = 3.
Glossy PVC A card made of PVC with a smooth polished surface (Surface
roughness of approximately 0 - 10 micro-inches). This is required
for direct to card Dye-Sublimation printing.
Graphical Device
Interface (GDI) A Windows standard for protocol between drivers and
applications and the Windows interface. An application uses a
driver to rasterize the data in the format necessary for the Printer
but also for the Windows interface to execute the print
commands.
Gray Scale A graduation through the various brightness levels from white to
black.
Halftoning A process in monochrome printing that simulates continuous tone
by using changes to the distribution of single dots. Increasing the
number of dots in a given area increases the darkness even
though the individual dots stay the same size.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 311
Glossary of Terms (continued)
Term Definition
Hard Drive A high capacity storage device in a PC consisting of non-
removable magnetically encodable platters.
Hardware Physical components of a system such as the Printer, the PC, the
power supply.
HDP (High Definition
Printing™) The High-Definition Printing process prints full-color images onto
clear HDP transfer film (InTM). The HDP film is then fused to the
card through heat and pressure via a heated Roller. The
Printhead is capable of 256 shades with a sharper print and better
color match.
Head Abbreviation for Printhead.
Heat sink A device used to dissipate heat into the ambient.
Heat Seal A resinous film transferred by the Printhead onto the back of an
HDP intermediate transfer film to facilitate adhesion.
HiCo (High
Coercivity) The Coercivity value of magnetic media between 2500 - 4000 Oe
(ISO 7811-6). Fargo's High Coercivity encodes at 2750 Oe.
HTML (HyperText
Markup Language) A standard protocol used to format text files for use in a browser
or on the Internet.
HTTP (HyperText
Transfer Protocol) A standard protocol by which computers can transfer data,
compatible through multiple platforms.
IC (Integrated Circuit) An electronic device that contains many individual circuits
interconnected and placed within a discrete package.
ID (Identification) An abbreviation for identification.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 312
Glossary of Terms (continued)
Term Definition
IEEE 1284 (Institute
of Electrical and
Electronics
Engineers 1284)
A standard method of signaling for a bi-directional parallel
interface on personal computers. To ensure proper Printer
communications and image output, Fargo recommends a parallel
interface cable that complies with this specification.
Image A collection of pictures or graphical elements that compose the
visual features on a card. Also refers to the digital representation.
Input Any data or material being transferred to the Printer.
Input Hopper The area of the Printer that stores the blank cards, ready to print.
Intermediate Transfer
Media (InTM) A thin flexible material coated with a resin material into which the
dye is transferred from the Ribbon by the Printhead. The film is
then transferred to the card surface by the hot lamination Roller.
ISO For the Greek, "iso", meaning same. Used to represent data from
the International Organization for Standardization.
JIS II (Japanese
Industrial Standard) The standard for encoding to a Magnetic Stripe provided by the
Japan Standards Association. The single track is as wide as ISO
tracks 1 and 2 combined and in the same approximate location as
those tracks but on the front of the card. The Coercivity level is
600 Oe.
K Panel An area of a multicolored Ribbon (e.g., YMCK) that contains black
resin for transfer to the card surface. Also used in reference to the
application of preference to items printed on the card - those
using the black panel in lieu of a process (YMC) black.
Lamination The application of a film or resinous substance, fused by heat and
pressure, to the surface of a card.
LAN (Local Area
Network) An array of several computers connected through a series of data
transfer cables for the sharing of data and peripherals.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 313
Glossary of Terms (continued)
Term Definition
Landscape A document layout that is viewed with the document's long axis in
a horizontal orientation.
LCD (Liquid Crystal
Display) A device that contains a liquid crystal between two pieces of
polarized film through which reflected or ambient light can pass.
When a current is applied, the liquid's polarity changes and blocks
the passage of the light resulting in an opaque area of the display.
The areas are arrayed to form characters.
LED (Light Emitting
Diode) A semiconductor that emits light when a current is applied.
Media A generic reference to anything onto which the Printer can
transfer an image including cards, Ribbon and film.
LoCo (Low
Coercivity) The Coercivity value of magnetic media between 250 - 600 Oe
(ISO 7811-2). Fargo's Low Coercivity encodes at 300 Oe.
LPT Port (Line
Printer Port) The system abbreviation for a PC's parallel Printer port.
Mag encoding The process of orienting successive magnetic bits to produce a
serial data string.
Mag stripe An area of the card with an applied or impregnated ferrous
material that can hold encoded data through a series of
prescribed polarity changes.
Mag Track An area of a magnetic strip running the length of the card, with a
given width and position, constitutes a track. This is the area
dedicated to one data string, restricted to specific rules of format.
ISO standards specify three Magnetic Tracks on the back of a
card. The JIS standard specifies one track on the front.
Mag Verify A process to confirm proper magnetic encoding. After encoding,
the information is read off back and compared to the intended
string.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 314
Glossary of Terms (continued)
Term Definition
MB (Megabyte) A unit of storage that equals 1,048,576 bytes.
Memory A generic term for any device that stores digital information using
magnetic media or digital chip storage device.
Menu A descriptive list of headings above nested functions that aid
navigation to a specific operation. These are found in computer
applications, with the heading at the top of a subset of like
functions. They are also on the Printer LCD control panel.
Monochrome An image composed of a single color.
Network A series of computers connected by data transfer cable for
communication and sharing of functions and peripherals.
Oersted (Oe) The unit of magnetic field strength named after Dutch scientist
Hans Christian Oersted who found the science of
electromagnetism.
Offset The prescribed distance between a reference point and the target
point. The offset in card printing can refer to the position of the
image relative to the leading edge or the distance of the start of
magnetic encoding from the leading edge of the card.
O-Ring A rubber ring used as a belt in several media driving applications.
OS (Operating
System) The instructions installed on the computer hard drive that run the
computer's operations and applications. The driver used for any
given OS will differ from other platforms. The correct version
driver must be loaded for the Printer to interface with the OS and
the application to print.
Output Any product of the Printer including card image, encoded data
and lamination.
Output hopper The portion of the Printer that accepts the completed cards.
Overlay A resin-like substance that is transferred by the Printhead to the
card surface over a printed dye image to prevent image fading,
increase abrasion durability and prevent dye migration.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 315
Glossary of Terms (continued)
Term Definition
Oversized Cards Oversized cards are used for more efficient visual identification
and are available in many non-standard sizes. The most popular
sizes are CR-90 (3.63" x 2.37"/92mm x 60mm) and CR-100 (3.88"
x 2.63"/98.5mm x 67mm).
Overlaminate Protective clear or holographic material to increase security and
durability applied over the printed surface with a hot Roller.
Parallel A method of data transfer in which serial data is divided into
sections and sent simultaneously down parallel wires to speed
transfer rate.
Parallel Port A communication socket on a device that allows for parallel data
transfer.
PC (Personal
Computer) A stand-alone, programmable, electronic device that can store,
retrieve and process data consisting of a CPU, mouse, keyboard
and monitor.
PCB (Printed Circuit
Board) A solid, multi-layered plate on which electronic elements are
attached, either through the board or on the surface.
Peel The removal of a film or Ribbon from a card surface (at a
perpendicular angle) to ensure proper transfer, then separation,
from the card surface.
Peel-Off A bar on the lamination section that holds the film at the correct
position and provides proper peel angle.
Peripheral Any device that is attached externally to a PC. These often share
the same data cable or port as a Printer and can be the source of
communication problems.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 316
Glossary of Terms (continued)
Term Definition
Pinch Roller A free spinning (non-driven) Roller that presses the card against
the drive Roller, on the opposite side, to ensure an adequate
normal force for proper traction.
Pixel Short for picture element. The smallest element of a graphic.
Platen The hard rubber Roller that drives the media through the Printer,
providing support to the backside of the media during printing or
laminating.
PET Abbreviation for polyester terephthalate, often called polyester.
Sheets of PET are laminated with sheets of PVC to produce
thermal acceptance composite cards.
Port A communication interface, serial or parallel, used for the
transference of data.
PolyGuard
Overlaminate A 1-mil or .6-mil thick polyester material that enhances card
security and durability applied over the printed surface with a hot
Roller. Available as clear or with embedded holographic-type
security images.
Portrait A document layout that is viewed with the document's long axis in
a vertical orientation.
Potentiometer An electronic resistor with a variable resistance value that can be
mechanically set.
Print Driver A software utility that serves as an interface between the Printer
and the Windows GDI (Graphical Device Interface), making the
Printer's functions available through the software application. It
also provides the format information for the rasterizing of the print
file including any necessary escape or function commands.
Print Job A file of one or more cards for the Printer to print, including image
data and Printer functions, transmitted through the parallel
interface and at times stored temporarily in the print Buffer and
spooler.
Print Server A device used to connect and control a Printer on a network.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 317
Glossary of Terms (continued)
Term Definition
Printhead The device on a Printer that produces the image on the media.
PVC Abbreviation for polyvinyl chloride, often called vinyl. PVC is the
component of the 0.002" thick clear, dye receptive film on the
surface of the identification card and is the primary component of
the identification card cores.
Queue A sequence of files or sets of data, awaiting transmission or
processing.
Proximity (“Prox”)
Card Proximity cards allow access and tracking utilizing contactless
technology, usually by communicating through a built-in antenna.
Prox Card Encoder The Fargo prox card Encoder uses an HID ProxPoint® Plus
reader mounted on the e-card docking Station inside the
Printer/Encoder. The ProxPoint is a "read only" device producing
a Wiegand signal that is converted to RS-232 using a Cypress
Computer Systems CVT-2232. Application programs can read
information from HID prox cards via a RS-232 signal through a
dedicated DB-9 port on the outside of the Printer labeled "Prox."
RAM (Random
Access Memory) A storage device for digital information to be held temporarily, to
facilitate processing.
Rasterize The process of converting the elements of a graphic into a bitmap
to be printed.
Reboot Cycling the power to the Printer so that it resets and reinitializes.
Registration The quality of the alignment of the separate primary-color images:
YMCK.
Resident Font A set of characters loaded into the Printer memory that can be
programmed to print those characters on the card without
rasterizing the image.
Resin A semi-solid material.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 318
Glossary of Terms (continued)
Term Definition
Resolution The number of individual pixels in a graphic, taken over a given
length, used to indicate the sharpness of the picture and the level
of detail. The number of elements in the Printhead determines
Fargo Printer resolution.
RFI (Radio
Frequency
Interference)
Electromagnetic waves radiated by poorly shielded cables or
electronic devices that interferes with the operation or data
transfer of another device.
RFID (Radio
Frequency
Identification)
This is a way of transmitting information via radio frequency. Data
is sent from an RFID transceiver to an RFID tag (that is
embedded in a Resin Ribbon).
RGB
(Red/Green/Blue) The three primary colors of the luminance or additive, model.
Combinations of these three colors can produce practically all the
colors of the spectrum that humans can detect. Computer
monitors operate on an RGB model.
Ribbon The dye impregnated film that is used for color printing.
Ribbon cable Parallel wires held flat in a row by plastic insulation.
RibbonTraq A Fargo Electronics method of placing bar code-like marks on the
transition area between color panels. These marks are arranged
for detection by a reflective Sensor array for the identification of
Ribbon type and the Ribbon position.
RMA number (Return
Merchandise
Authorization
number)
A number, acquired from Fargo Support, which authorizes the
return of merchandise for repair or credit.
Roller Elements of the Printer used for the transport of media consisting
of a rotating steel shaft (for Ribbon) or a rotating steel shaft with a
rubber cylinder installed at the shaft midpoint (for moving cards).
RS-232 An interface standard, established in 1969 by the Electronic
Industries Association, regarding the connecting of computer
peripherals.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 319
Glossary of Terms (continued)
Term Definition
Saturation A measure of the degree of color, from gray, with the same
brightness.
Self-test A pre-determined print file used to confirm Printer operation
typically sent from the driver or stored in the Printer's memory.
Sensor An electro-mechanical/electro-optical device used to indicate a
change in state in the Printer such as when a card reaches a
certain location.
Serial
communications The transfer of data, one bit at a time and in sequential order,
using a single wire.
Serial interface A sub D 9 pin input/output port on the Printer, used for serial
communication with the PC for AS400 operating systems or for e
card encoding.
SIMM (Single In-Line
Memory Module) An array of memory chips, attached to a printed circuit board that
installs in a slot on the main board.
Simplex Single-sided printing.
SmartGuard An application from Fargo Electronics that allows users to prevent
access to the Printer through the use of a personally encoded
Smart Card.
SmartGuard™ SmartGuard is a Printer security option that uses a custom access
card and a built-in reader to restrict Printer access. Only a valid
access card can enable the Printer to print cards.
SmartShield™ This option allows the Printer to print custom, security images on
the card that reflect under a black or UV light source.
Smart Card Smart cards have an embedded computer circuit that contains
either a memory chip or a microprocessor chip. There are several
types of Smart Cards: Memory, Contact, Contactless, Hybrid
(Twin), Combi (Dual Interface), Proximity and Vicinity.
Software Instructions saved in computer memory that directs the computer
to perform certain tasks and functions.
Spooler A computer application that allows the spooling of print jobs.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 320
Glossary of Terms (continued)
Term Definition
Spooling Rather than moving a print job directly to the Printer, the job is
written to the disk so that the user can access the application
faster while Windows takes care of printing in the background.
SS (Start Sentinel) The character denoting the end of a magnetic data string.
Stacker The device that moves the finished cards onto the output column
or dering them First In, First Out.
Stepper Motor A Motor whose shaft turns in discrete steps, rather than
continuously.
String A sequence of characters that form a line of data.
Surface mount A method of mounting circuit elements onto the surface of a
circuit board, attached at solder pads, rather than through holes in
the board.
Surge Protector An electronic device, placed in serial to the Printer's power
supply, that prevents damage to the Printer from electronic surges
and electrical current that is outside of the normal parameters.
Switch Box An electromechanical device to which a user can connect several
peripheral devices to the Parallel Port simultaneously, yet using
the selector switch to designate the active port.
TAC Thermal Acceptance Composite cards. Card stock produced by
laminating sheets of PVC with sheets of PET for better thermal
distortion resistance. Ultra III cards.
Temp file A temporary file, generated automatically by Windows, to store
the information for an active document. Windows should delete
these files when the application is closed.
Test Print A file stored in or generated through windows that is sent to the
Printer to test basic functionality.
Thermistor An electronic resistor on the Printhead with a resistance value
that varies in proportion to the heat to which it is exposed.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 321
Glossary of Terms (continued)
Term Definition
Thermocouple A device for measuring temperature using a junction of two wires
of dissimilar metals that produce a voltage when heated that
varies proportionally with the temperature.
Thin Film
Overlaminate A 0.25-mil thick resin material that enhances card security and
durability applied over the printed surface with a hot Roller.
Available as clear or with embedded holographic-type security
images.
Through-hole A method of mounting circuit elements with the leads passing
through holes in the circuit board and soldered on the opposite
side.
Timeout An interruption of a print job that occurs when a function is not
completed in the time allotted by the operating system.
TOF (Top of Form) The leading edge of the card, as it travels through the Printer.
Track The area on a mag stripe designated to contain the magnetic data
string.
Troubleshooting The process of investigating and determining the cause of a
problem.
TrueType (TT) A font format that produces each character using a mathematical
equation, rather than a graphical representation, resulting in a
much sharper, cleaner image.
UltraCard The Fargo brand of card stock recommended for use in Fargo
Printers, with the necessary glossy surface and composed of
PVC.
UltraCard III The Fargo brand of card stock, recommended for use in Fargo
Printers that laminate, with the necessary glossy surface and
composed of PVC and PET to prevent heat distortion.
Update The process of installing a new revision of software or Firmware
to implement new changes to the Printer's command codes and
procedures.
Continued on the next page
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 322
Glossary of Terms (continued)
Term Definition
UPS (Un-interruptible
Power Supply) An AC power supply, typically powered by batteries, which
provides temporary power to the PC or Printer during an
interruption of the supply voltage.
USB (Universal
Serial Bus) A 1.5M/sec (12Mbit/sec) serial communication interface that can
support 127 separate devices consisting of 4 wires: power,
ground, data in and data out.
Virtual Memory A technique used by Windows when chip memory is exhausted,
in which data is written to the hard to hold data temporarily and
support Window's operations.
Wrinkle The appearance in the card image of wavy or arched lines, either
colored or clear, caused by improper film or Ribbon tension.
YMC The designation of colored Ribbon by the panels of color in the
order in which they are printed: Yellow (Y), Magenta (M) and
Cyan (C).
YMCK The designation of colored Ribbon by the panels of color in the
order in which they are printed: Yellow (Y), Magenta (M), Cyan
(C) and Black (K).
YMCKH The designation of colored Ribbon by the panels of color in the
order in which they are printed: Yellow (Y), Magenta (M), Cyan
(C), Black (K) and Heat Seal (H).
YMCKK The designation of colored Ribbon by the panels of color in the
order in which they are printed: Yellow (Y), Magenta (M), Cyan
(C), Black (K), Black (K) (the second K is for backside, black only
printing).
YMCKO The designation of colored Ribbon by the panels of color in the
order in which they are printed: Yellow (Y), Magenta (M), Cyan
(C), Black (K) and Overlay (O).
YMCKOK The designation of colored Ribbon by the panels of color in the
order in which they are printed: Yellow (Y), Magenta (M), Cyan
(C), Black (K), Overlay (O), Black (K) (used for backside, black
only printing).
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 323
Index
A
A/B Switch Box, 90
About button, 205
AC - Alternating Current, 303
Accepted Card Thickness, 8
Accepted Standard Card Size, 8
Access Card, 303
Accessories Program Group, 64
Adhesion, 303
Adjusting the Flipper offset, 77, 78
Adjusting the Image Darkness, 105
Adjusting the Internal Card Guide, 124, 125
Adjusting the Ribbon Tension, 103
Agency Listings, 8
Algebraic, 137, 303
Align Ribbon error, 82
Aligning Ribbon, 46
all Printers share all print jobs, 145
ANSI (American National Standards Institute), 303
Apply SmartShield option, 196
AS400, 303
ASCII (American Standard Code for Information
Interchange), 303
ASCII Offset, 172
AT, 303
Auto Eject 1st Error option, 174
auto eject option, 174
B
B (Black), 303
Barcodes, 8, 304
batch print, 304
batch print speed, 10
batch printing, 174
Battery Back-up, 304
BAUD Rate Settings, 253
Bi-directional, 304
BIOS (Basic Input/Output System), 304
Bit, 304
Bit Density, 171
Bit map, 304
black graphics, 152
black text or barcodes, 152
BO or Dye Sub Black, Overlay, 136
Board, 304
Boot-up, 304
Buffer, 304
Buffer single card, 146
C
Cable, 304
Cache, 305
Calibrating, 305
Cancel button, 21
Cancel soft key, 174
Card Cleaning, 9
Card Cleaning Cartridge, 15, 67
Card Count, 113, 240
Card Count (CC), Pass Count (PC) and Transfer Count
(TC), 255
Card Design, 26
Card Feed Roller Motors, 77, 78
Card Feeding Errors, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73
card grid, 156, 183
card grid area, 182
card grid lines, 185
Card Hopper Jam, 46
Card Input Guide adjustment, 118, 119, 120, 121, 122,
123
Card Input Hopper, 15, 29
Card Input Hopper Capacity, 8
Card is encoded, 79
Card Jam
Flipper, 47
Mag, 47
Print, 47
Smart, 47
Card Jam, 47
Card jam in Printer’s Smart Card encoding area, 78
Card Lamination Module, 33, 130, 131
card orientation, 186
Card Output Hopper, 15
Card Output Hopper Capacity, 8
Card Sensor, 73
Card Size, 26, 198
Card statistics, 236
Card Surface, 26
card surface debris problems, 97, 98, 99
Card Thickness Adjustment Lever, 15
card thickness settings, 68
Card Thickness Slide, 68
Card Types, 8
cards look pixilated or grainy, 110
card's Magnetic Stripe/smart chip, 143, 144
Card's smart chip encoded improperly, 76
CD (Compact Disc), 305
Centronics, 305
Centronics-Type Parallel Interface, 24
Change parameter, 237
Changing the Encoder settings, 74, 75
Changing the Encoder Settings, 76
Character ASCII Offset, 172
Character Parity, 173
Character Size radio buttons, 171
chip U2 (080066), 231
Clean Printer, 50
Cleaning Card, 67
Cleaning Cartridge, 95, 98, 218
Cleaning Inside Printer, 97
Cleaning Kit, 94
Cleaning Pen, 94
Cleaning Platen Rollers, 99
Cleaning Platen/Card Feed Rollers, 220
Cleaning Roller, 218, 305
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 324
Cleaning Tape, 95, 98
Cleaning Tape loop, 218
Cleaning the Platen, 223
Cleaning the Printer's Exterior, 224
Cleaning the Printer's Interior, 224
Cleaning the Printhead (850102), 217
Clear Protective Overlay Panel, 25
Coercivity, 79, 305
Coercivity of cards matches driver setting, 81
Coercivity option, 166
Color Bars YMC, 112
color correcting, 137
color matching, 137, 305
color matching algorithm, 137
Color Matching software, 137
Colored Resin, 136
Colors, 9
Colors misregistered, 62
Communication Errors, 62, 66
Compressed air, 305
compressed Firmware Update file, 258
Contrast, 305
Contrast/Gamma, 149
Control panel, 305
Copies, 203
copyright/version information, 205
correct Printer installation, 62
CR-100, 306
CR-79, 306
CR-80, 306
CR-80, CR-90 and CR-100, 198
CR-90, 306
CR-90 or CR-100 Patch Size, 43
CSA, 7
Current value, 236
Cursor, 306
Custom holographic-type, 43
customization options, 168
cut off or off-center Card, 109
D
Darkness, 306
Data for Magnetic Stripe printed on card, 81
Data Input, 47
Data Timeout, 47
Data to Track 1, 176
Data to Track 2, 176
Data to Track 3, 176
DB-9, 306
DC (Direct Current), 306
DC Motor, 306
Decrease/Increase the Print Offset value, 244
Default, 306
Default button, 151
default ISO Standard selections, 171, 173
defined area, 186
Defined Area(s) check box, 156
Defined Area(s) option, 154, 180, 182
Defrag, 306
Delete button, 186
Device Manager TAB, 65
Device Option tab, 84, 100
Device Options tab, 135
Digital Voltmeter, 89
Dimension boxes, 157
Dimensions, 9
DIP switches (Dual In-line Package Switches), 306
Direct-to-Card (DTC) Printing, 307
disable printing, 147
disk cleanup utility, 66
Display, 9
Dither, 307
Dither method, 138
DMA (Direct Memory Access), 305
Dongle, 307
Dot, 307
Dot pitch, 307
Download, 307
DPI (Dot Per Inch), 307
DRAM (Dynamic Random Access Memory), 307
DRAM Memory Error, 47, 231
Driver, 307
DTC Film, 96, 99
DTC Ribbon, 85
DTC500 Card Printer, 229
DTC510/515, 10
DTC515/525, 8
DTC515/DTC525 only, 200
DTC520/525, 10
DTC525-LC, 10
dual-sided card, 140
Duplex Printing, 307
Dwell Time, 308
Dye Migration, 308
Dye-Sub Intensity slide, 149
dye-sub printed image, 149
Dye-Sublimation, 13, 308
Dye-Sublimation black, 12
Dye-Sublimation Cyan Panel, 25
Dye-Sublimation Magenta Panel, 25
Dye-Sublimation Ribbon panels, 149
Dye-Sublimation Yellow Panel, 25
E
E-card, 308
E-card Docking Station, 308
ECP Mode (Enhanced Capabilities Port Mode), 308
edge of card, 250
Edge-to-Edge, 308
EE Checksum Error, 48, 230
EE Memory, 308
EE Memory Error, 48, 230
EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable Read
Only Memory), 308
Ejecting Used Card, 48
embedded contaminants, 26
Emissions Standards, 8
Enable MLE Support checkbox, 169
Encode Station, 20
Encoder (Smart Card), 308
Encoder (wheel), 309
Encoder Settings, 75, 76, 249
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 325
encoding data, 76
Encoding data sent in error, 74
encoding instructions, 147
Encoding Mode, 166
Encoding Module, 77
End Sentinel (ES)., 177
Engine, 309
Enhanced Communication Port (ECP) mode, 65
EOF (End Of Form), 309
EPP (Enhanced Parallel Port), 309
EPROM (Electronically Programmable Read Only
Memory), 309
Error displayed on startup, 88
Escape sequence, 309
ESD, 132, 216
ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge), 309
Ethernet, 309
Exception Card Slot, 220
Exception Log, 254
Exception Log, 236
excessive resin printing problems, 105, 107
Exit Hopper, 77
Extended Capabilities Port (ECP), 24
external device interference, 63, 64, 65
F
Failed magnetic encode, 75
Failed Smart Encode, 76
Failed To Initialize, 48
Fargo Technical Support, 300
Fargo Technical Support via the Web, 300
FCC, 7
feed card into Encoder/magnetically encode, 81
Feeder Station, 20
Field Separator (FS), 177
Film, 309
Firmware, 309
Firmware file link, 258
Firmware Updater Application Program, 256, 257
Firmware Updater dialog, 259
Firmware Updater window, 259
Firmware Updates, 257, 258, 261, 262
Firmware Upgrade, 255
First Available, 200
Flash Memory, 310
Flashing GREEN, 22
Flipper Alignment, 48
Flipper Home Sensor, 89
Flipper Offset, 77, 78, 253
Flipper Table, 70, 71
Flipper Table Home Sensor, 89
Flipper Table Tension Spring, 71
Font, 310
Fonts, 9
For Overlay Only, 181
For Print and Overlay, 181
For Print Only (No Overlay), 181
formatting magnetic string, 81
FORWARD softkey button, 220
FPGA, 48
FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array), 310
FPGA error, 231
FPGA Load Fail, 48
FPGA Timeout, 48
Full bleed, 310
Full Card option, 153, 180
Full Color with resin black, 12
Full Color, no resin black, 12
Functional Specifications, 13, 14
G
Gamma, 310
Glossy PVC, 310
Glossy/Matte, 310
Graphical Device Interface (GDI), 310
Gray Scale, 310
Gray/Align YMC, 248
Gray/Align YMC (DTC510/515) and Gray/Align
YMC/K (DTC520/525), 239
Gray/Align YMCK, 111
H
H-1 or H-2 softkey buttons, 200
Halftoning, 310
Hard Drive, 311
hard drive space
adequate or inadequate, 66
Hardware, 311
HDP (High Definition Printing™), 311
Head, 311
Head Lift, 48
Head Resistance Error, 49
Head Voltage Error, 49
Headlift Motor, 86
Heat Seal, 311
Heat sink, 311
HiCo (High Coercivity), 311
High Coercivity, 166
High Coercivity Magnetic Stripes, 164
High Coercivity UltraCards, 166
high-resolution, 24-bit color images, 110
Hopper 1, 200
Hopper 1 Empty, 49
Hopper 2, 200
Hopper 2 Empty, 49
Hopper Lift, 69
Hopper Settings, 252
Hopper Travel Assembly, 72
Hopper Travel Motor, 72
HTML (HyperText Markup Language), 311
HTTP (HyperText Transfer Protocol), 311
Humidity, 9
I
IC (Integrated Circuit), 311
ID (Identification), 311
ID software applications, 177
IEEE 1284 (Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineers 1284), 312
I-EEE 1284 compliant cable, 62
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 326
Image, 312
Image Color tab, 103, 105, 107, 137, 149, 151
Image Darkness, 100, 248
Image Position controls, 206
inadequate data cable, 62
incorrect image darkness problems, 100
Initial, 40
Input, 312
Input Hopper, 69, 312
Input Hopper Door, 72, 76
Interface, 9
interface cable, 259
Intermediate Transfer Media (InTM), 312
Interpreting LCD display Messages, 254
Invalid Print Ribbon, 49
ISO, 312
ISO 7811-2 Magnetic Stripe, 176
ISO encoded data format, 168, 170
ISO option, 166
ISO Standard Encoding Module, 164
ISO Standard selections, 173
ISO Track Locations, 176
J
jammed card, 78
jewelry, 94
JIS C 6220 Type II cards, 164
JIS II (Japanese Industrial Standard), 312
JIS II option/JIS II mode/JIS II Magnetic Head, 164
JIS II Standard Encoding Module, 164
K
K Panel, 312
K Panel Resin options, 186
K Panel Resin tab, 153, 154
L
Lamination, 312
Lamination Board, 89
Lamination Module, 34, 35, 36, 37
Laminator, 40
Laminator Controls, 30
Laminator Temperature Adjustment, 41
LAN (Local Area Network), 312
Landscape, 313
LCD, 77, 100, 103, 105, 107
LCD (Liquid Crystal Display), 313
LCD and Softkey Control Pad, 19, 20, 23
LCD display, 15, 19, 22, 77, 174
LCD error, 74
LCD Firmware, 262
LCD Menu, 235
LCD Menu and Selecting an Option, 236
LCD On-Line Menu Navigation, 235
LCD panel, 77, 78
LCD Setting, 75, 76
LED (Light Emitting Diode), 313
LED light, 15, 22
less heat, 150
less saturated resin images, 150
Loading the Overlaminate, 117
LoCo (Low Coercivity), 313
Low Coercivity, 166
LPT Port (Line Printer Port), 313
LRC Generation, 173
LRC Generation Mode, 173
M
Mag Encode Failed, 50
Mag encoding, 313
Mag stripe, 313
Mag Track, 313
Mag Verify, 313
Magnetic Card Analyzer, 250
Magnetic Encoder, 74
Magnetic encoding area of Printer, 77
Magnetic Encoding tab, 163
Magnetic Offset Setting, 74
Magnetic Stripe, 79
Magnetic Stripe Encoding Modules, 164
Magnetic Stripe encoding process, 163
Magnetic Stripe verification, 174
Magnetic Test, 77
Magnetic TOF, 250, 251
Magnetic TOF setting, 250
Magnetic Track data, 177
Magnetic Track options, 168, 170
Magnetic Track Selection, 166
Magnetic Track Selection option, 166
Main Board, 74
Main Firmware, 259, 261
Main Firmware/LCD Firmware, 259
Main Print Board, 87, 88, 230
Manual Eject Each Error option, 174
manual eject mode, 174
MB (Megabyte), 314
Measuring area positioned on card, 159
Media, 313
Memory, 314
Memory, 9
Menu, 314
MENU button, 235
Menu option, 20
MENU, Setup Printer and Encoder Settings, 249
Metallic Resin, 136
mistakenly-verified card, 174
mode of operation, 19
Monochrome, 314
more heat, 150
Motor operation, 82, 89
Multi-Language Extension (MLE), 169
Multimeter, 82, 85
Multiple Cards Fed, 50
N
Network, 314
New Temperature Setting, 30
new value, 78
No ENC Response, 50
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 327
No MAG Encoder, 50
No Magnetic Encoder, 74
No Smart Encoder, 50, 75, 76
No SmartShield, 196
O
obstruction, 89
Oersted (Oe), 314
Off, 22
Offset, 314
Omit Mag Stripe Area option, 180
Omit Signature Area option, 180
Omit Signature Area setting, 183
Omit Smart Chip Area option, 180
Operating Temperature, 9
O-Ring, 314
OS (Operating System), 314
Output, 314
Output hopper, 314
overall print area, 206
Overlaminate, 315
Overlaminate Design, 43
Overlay, 314
Overlay (O) Panel, 179
Overlay/Print Area, 179, 182, 183, 185
Overlay/Print Area options, 181
Oversized Cards, 315
P
Parallel, 315
Parallel Interface Port, 17
Parallel Port, 315
Parallel Port mode, 65
Pass Count, 113, 240
Pause button, 21
Pause..., 50
PC (Personal Computer), 315
PCB (Printed Circuit Board), 315
Peel, 315
Peel-Off, 315
Peripheral, 315
permanent circuit memory, 230
PET, 316
Photo, 138
Pinch Roller, 316
Pixel, 316
pixel failure problems, 94, 95, 96
Platen, 316
Platen Rollers, 96, 99
Please Remove Card, 50
PolyGuard Overlaminate, 316
poor image quality problems, 109, 110
Port, 316
Portrait, 316
Portrait/Landscape, 203
Position magnetic data, 250
Potentiometer, 316
Power Port, 16
Power Switch, 16
prevents magnetic encoding, 169
Print All Black with K Panel, 153
Print and Transfer Stations, 20
Print Area, 9
Print Back Side First option, 141
Print back side only, 142
print both sides, 139, 140
Print Both Sides option, 140, 142
Print Data, 51
Print Driver, 316
Print Job, 316
Print Offset, 244
Print Offset, Transfer TOF and Transfer EOF, 243
print Ribbon, 97
Print Ribbon Low, 51
Print Ribbon options, 12
Print Ribbon Out, 51
Print Ribbon problem, 83
Print Ribbon replacement, 83
Print Ribbons, 25
Print Server, 316
Print Speed, 10
Print Station, 94
Print Status Screen, 20
Print Test Image, 77, 111
Print Test Image, Setup Printer, Show error count, Show
card count and System Upgrade, 236
print the first page of a two-page document, 141
Print Timeout, 51
Print YMC Under K and Print K Only options, 161
Print YMC Under K/Print K Only options, 161
Print/Transfer Stations, 77
printed text and barcodes, 161
Printer cannot align Flipper, 89
Printer cannot read encoded data, 79
Printer Cleaning Kit, 94, 96, 220, 224
Printer mat, 87
Printer pausing between panels, 87
Printer's Firmware, 259
Printer's memory full, 145, 146
Printer's memory to Buffer, 146
Printhead, 16, 217, 317
Printhead Cables, 88
Printhead Cleaning Pen, 217
Printhead Fan, 87
Printhead NO raise/lower, 86
Printhead Resistance, 246, 247
Printhead Temp, 51
Printhead temperature malfunctioning, 88
Printhead Temperature Regulator, 88
Printing a Test Image, 111
Printing Method, 10
Printing Process Errors, 82, 83
Printing Resolution, 11
Program Exception, 51
Prox Card Encoder, 317
Prox Setting, 75
Proximity cards, 26
PVC, 317
PVC laminate, 26
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 328
Q
Queue, 317
R
RAM (Random Access Memory), 317
RAM Memory Error, 51, 231
Rasterize, 317
Reboot, 317
Receiving encoding data, 74
recorded magnetic data, 175
Registration, 317
Regulator, 87
Regulatory Compliances, 7
removable Memory Module (SIMM), 231
Repair by taping Ribbon, 82
Replacing Headlift Sensor Assembly, 86
Replacing Main Board, 88
Replacing the Card Cleaning Tape, 218
Replacing the Headlift Motor Assembly, 86
Report Supplies, 254
reseat cable, 87
Resident Font, 317
Resin, 317
Resin black, 12
resin black (K) panel, 154, 155, 156
Resin Black Panel, 25
resin Dither, 138
Resin Heat slide, 150
resin images, 150
Resin Thermal Transfer, 14
Resolution, 318
Resolving card feeding problem, 90, 91, 93
Resume button, 82, 86
retries, 174
Reviewing the Module’s Programmed Default
Temperature, 40
RFI (Radio Frequency Interference), 318
RFID (Radio Frequency Identification), 318
RFID Tag, 51
RGB, 112
RGB (Red/Green/Blue), 318
Ribbon, 318
Ribbon cable, 318
Ribbon jammed, 82
Ribbon panels, 140
Ribbon Sensor, 82, 85, 232
Ribbon type, 84, 136
Ribbon Type setting, 84
Ribbon wrinkle problems, 103, 104
Ribbon/Cards, 132, 216
RibbonTraq, 318
RibbonTraq mark, 82, 85
RibbonTraq marks, 232
RMA number, 318
Roller, 318
Rotate Front 180 Degrees option, 186
rotate front by 180 Degrees, 143
rotates image, 143, 144
RS-232, 318
S
safety issues, 114, 132, 216
Safety Standards, 8
Saturation, 319
Save this Program to Disk, 258
scroll buttons, 17, 19
second K panel, 140
Security Features, 12
Select Function, 236
Select Function screen, 235
Select Printer button, 259, 262
Select Test Image, 236
Select Update File button, 259, 262
Selecting Orientation - Landscape under Card tab, 188
Selecting Orientation – Portfolio under Card tab, 190
Selecting the Visual Security Solutions, 191, 192, 193
Selecting the Visual Security Solutions dropdown menu,
189
Self-test, 319
Sending Update to Printer dialog, 261, 262
Sensor, 319
Sensor, 234
Sensor Location and Voltages, 232
Sensor Location/Voltage, 233
Sensor Testing, 232
Serial interface, 319
Serial Interface Port, 17
Setup Printer, 77, 78, 248
SETUP.EXE file, 257
Shift Data Left option, 175
Show card count, 255
Show card count, 236
Show error count, 254
Show the Error Count Tool, 254
SIMM, 319
Simplex, 319
Slide Lock, 68
Smart Card, 319
Smart Encode Failed, 52
Smart Setting, 76
SmartGuard, 319
SmartGuard Access Card, 196
SmartGuard™, 319
SmartShield Area dropdown menu, 196
SmartShield™, 319
Softkey Buttons, 16, 19
Software, 319
Software Drivers, 12
software user’s manual, 75
Solid GREEN, 22
special precautions, 132, 216
Specifications, 7
Split 1 Ribbon Panels, 139
Split 1 Ribbon Panels, 140
Split 1 Set - Ribbon Panels, 140
Spooler, 319
Spooling, 320
SS (Start Sentinel), 320
SS, ES, FS, 177
Stacker, 320
Standard or Premium Resin or K, 136
RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics, Inc.
DTC500 Series Card Printer/Encoders User Guide (Rev. 6.0) 329
Start Sentinel, 251
Start Sentinel (SS), 177, 250
Start Sentinel distance, 250
Starting Selftest, 52
static build up, 69
Stepper Motor, 320
String, 320
Supply Frequency, 12
Supply Voltage, 12
Surface mount, 320
Switch Box, 90, 91, 320
System Check Screens, 19
System Control panel, 65
System Requirements, 12
System Upgrade, 255
System Upgrade, 236
System Upgrade option, 259
T
TAC, 320
Tape Rollers, 98
Target Temperature, 40
Technical Specifications, 8
Temp file, 320
Temperature Adjustment, 30
Test Image, 239
Test Print, 320
Test Print option, 204, 207
Testing Memory, 52
Thermistor, 320
Thermocouple, 321
Through-hole, 321
Timeout, 321
to Buffer/to hold, 145, 146
TOF (Top of Form), 321
total card area, 157
Track, 321
Track Information, 177
track number (1, 2 or 3), 177
Transfer Count, 113, 240
Transfer Platen Roller, 96, 99
Transfer Station, 97
troubleshoot the Printer, 300
Troubleshooting, 321
TrueType (TT), 321
TrueType black text and TrueType barcodes, 152
TÜ V-EMC, 7
TÜV-GS, 7
U
UL, 7
UltraCard, 321
UltraCard III, 321
UltraCard Stock, 26
Unable To Feed Card, 52
unable to read encoded data, 74
Undefined Area(s) - K Panel Resin tab, 155
Undefined Area(s) option, 155, 180
Unknown Ribbon Type, 85
Update, 321
Update Failed, 52
Update file, 258
Update Firmware Now, 52
Upgrade Failed or Upgrade Firmware Now on, 261
Upgrade Successful, 262
UPS (Un-interruptible Power Supply), 322
USB (Universal Serial Bus), 322
V
Verification, 174
Virtual Memory, 322
visible damage, 94
W
Weight, 12
Windows 2000/XP, 84, 100, 103, 105, 107
Windows 95/98/ME, 84, 100, 103, 105, 107
Windows NT 4.0, 84, 100, 103, 105, 107
wires not pinched, 87
Wrinkle, 322
wrong Print Ribbon, 52, 84
X
X and Y boxes, 159, 185
Y
Yellow (Y), Magenta (M), Cyan (C) Ribbon panels, 161
Yellow, Magenta and Cyan, 148, 149, 150
YMC, 322
YMC, YMCK or YMCKK print Ribbon, 205
YMCK, 136, 322
YMCK or YMCKK print Ribbon, 138
YMCK/YMCKK print Ribbons, 140
YMCKH, 136, 322
YMCKK, 322
YMCKO, 322
YMCKOK, 322

Navigation menu